PEGAsys

Intelligent Suppression Control

and Fire Alarm System
Installation,
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
July 2003
P/N 76-100016-001
R
LISTED
FM
APPROVED
UL Listing File No. S2422 Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY
PEGAsys

Intelligent Suppression Control

and Fire Alarm System
Installation,
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
July 2003
P/N 76-100016-001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
i
FOREWORD
TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AC Alternating Current
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AH Ampre Hour
AI Addressable Contact Input Device
AO Addressable Relay Output Device
AST Alarm Simulation Test
ATM Annunciator Terminal Module
BIP Broadcast Indexed Protocol
BPM Beats Per Minute
CCM Central Control Module
CCP Central Control Panel
DC Direct Current
EDP Electronic Data Processing
EOC Event Output Control
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FCP Fire Control Panel
GUI Graphical User Interface
HSSD High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector
HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
I/O Input/Output
ID Identification
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
ML Multi-Loop
NC Normally Closed
Note: This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only
This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System.
This publication describes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression
Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 for Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System.
NCCM Networkable Central Control Module
NIC Network Interface Card
NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
NO Normally Open
NR Not Registered
NYC New York City
P/N Part Number
PALM PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module
PAS Positive Alarm Sequence
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCS PEGAsys Configuration Software
PC Line Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop)
PS Power Supply
RCU Remote Control Unit
RDCM Remote Display Control Module
RDM Remote Display Module
RTC Real-Time Clock
RX/TX Receive Transmit
SL Single-Loop
SLC Signaling Line Circuit
SPDT Single Pole, Double Throw
UL Underwriter Laboratories
V Volts
Vac Voltage Alternating Current
Vdc Voltage Direct Current
ii
ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501)
UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.
NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III.
PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)
UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.
NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III.
iii
Foreword ................................................................................................................................... i
Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................................................... i
Appendices ................................................................................................................................ vii
List of Illustrations...................................................................................................................... viii
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................. x
Safety Summary ........................................................................................................................ xi
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 General Information ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-1.1 System Description.................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1.2 System Components ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1-2 Component Description ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.2 Display Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2
1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1-2.7 Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.7.1 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-2.7.2 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-2.7.3 Agent Release Output Module................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.7.4 City-Tie Module.......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.8 Remote Display/Control Modules .............................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2.10 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.11 Standby Batteries....................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.12 Intelligent Loop Devices ............................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.12.1 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.12.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 1-6
1-2.12.3 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.14 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.15 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7
1-2.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing.............................................................................................. 1-7
1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 1-7
1-2.18 ORION XT Interface Module ..................................................................................................... 1-7
1-2.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8
1-2.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8
1-3 System Specification ................................................................................................................. 1-8
2 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2-1.1 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2 Controls and Indicators.............................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2.1 LCD Display............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2.2 Audible Device........................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3 System Security......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.1 Levels of Security ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.2 Default Passwords..................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.3 Entering Passwords................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-4 System Power-Up...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-5 System Menus ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.1 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-4
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE
2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus ................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4 Menu Functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.1 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.2 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5.4.3 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5.4.4 Test Menu Function ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.2.1 Alarm Mode Indications ............................................................................................................. 2-7
2-6.2.2 Alarm Mode User Action ............................................................................................................ 2-7
2-6.3 Active Supervisory Mode ........................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6.3.1 Supervisory Mode Indication ..................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6.3.2 Supervisory Mode User Action .................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode .................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6.4.1 Trouble Mode Indications .......................................................................................................... 2-11
2-6.4.2 Trouble Mode User Action ......................................................................................................... 2-11
2-7 Printing Operation...................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8 System Programming ................................................................................................................ 2-12
2-8.1 EOC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.1.1 Listing EOC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2 RTC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.1 Listing RTC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.2 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................ 2-13
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.1 System Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 2-13
2-8.3.2 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ....................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.3 RX/TX Loops ............................................................................................................................. 2-13
2-8.3.4 System Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.5 System Output Modules ............................................................................................................ 2-13
2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules ...................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.5 Registering Output Module Assignments................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.5.1 Listing Output Module Assignment ............................................................................................ 2-14
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.7 Registering RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-8.7.1 Detector Registration ................................................................................................................. 2-15
2-8.7.2 Addressable Monitor Module Registration ................................................................................. 2-15
2-8.7.3 Remote Control Module Registration......................................................................................... 2-16
2-8.7.4 Listing all Registered RCUs....................................................................................................... 2-16
2-8.7.5 De-Registering RCUs ................................................................................................................ 2-16
3 Functional Description............................................................................................................ 3-1
3-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3-2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Functional Descriptions ............................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.1 Central Control Module.............................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 3-3
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 3-4
3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3-3.5 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3-3.6 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 3-6
3-3.7 Agent Release Output Module................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3.8 City-Tie Module.......................................................................................................................... 3-7
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE
3-3.9 Remote Display Control Modules .............................................................................................. 3-8
3-3.10 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3.11 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-3.12 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-9
3-3.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3.14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 3-9
3-3.15 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3.16 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-9
3-3.17 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10
3-3.18 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing.............................................................................................. 3-10
3-3.19 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-3.20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) ............................................................................ 3-11
3-3.21 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3.22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12
4 Maintenance Procedure .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4-2 Scheduled Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4-3 Maintenance Procedures........................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.1 Lamp Test .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4-3.2 Loop Device Test ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.3 Battery Test ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4-3.4 Walk Test ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-3.4.1 Walk Testing Detectors.............................................................................................................. 4-2
4-3.4.2 Walk Test Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-2
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ..................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3.5.1 AST Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits................................................................................ 4-3
4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits ............................................................................................................ 4-4
4-5 Powering Down the System....................................................................................................... 4-4
4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure ............................................................................................................ 4-4
4-6 Powering Up the System ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-4
5 Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ..................................................................... 5-1
5-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5-2 Standard Fault-Isolation Techniques.......................................................................................... 5-1
5-2.1 Visual Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-2.2 Power Checks ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-4 Removal and Replacement ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.1 Required Tools........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.2 Central Control Module.............................................................................................................. 5-2
5-4.3 RX/TX Module ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.4 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
6 Parts List .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
7 Installation................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7-2 Materials Required For Installation ............................................................................................ 7-1
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE
7-3 Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ...................................................................... 7-1
7-4 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ..................................................................... 7-1
7-5 Installation Procedure For Output Motherboard ........................................................................ 7-2
7-6 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ...................................................... 7-2
7-7 Installation of Output Modules ................................................................................................... 7-3
7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module ................................................................................................... 7-3
7-7.2 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.3 Agent Release Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ........................................................... 7-4
7-7.7 Power Supply Communication Connections.............................................................................. 7-5
7-8 Connecting AC Power ............................................................................................................... 7-5
7-9 Install And Connect DC Power .................................................................................................. 7-6
7-9.1 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-9.2 Batteries .................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-10 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module............................................................................... 7-6
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7-11 Output Signal Connection.......................................................................................................... 7-8
7-12 External Power Failure Indicator Connection ............................................................................ 7-8
7-13 Detector Installation ................................................................................................................... 7-8
7-14 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities................................................... 7-8
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure .................................... 7-9
7-15 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .......................................................................... 7-9
7-16 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ........................................................................... 7-9
7-17 Installation Checkout ................................................................................................................. 7-10
7-18 Connection of Peripherals ......................................................................................................... 7-10
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ........................................................................... 7-10
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer .................................................................................................................. 7-10
vii
A Power Supply Requirements ..................................................................................................... A-1
B System Expansion ..................................................................................................................... B-1
C Releasing Applications .............................................................................................................. C-1
D Reserved for Future Use ........................................................................................................... D-1
E Factory Mutual Sprinkler Requirements for Pre-Action and Deluge Type Sprinkler Systems .... E-1
F Glossary .................................................................................................................................... F-1
G Display Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ G-1
H Wiring Requirements for PEGAsys Signaling Line Circuit RX/TX ............................................. H-1
I System Drawings....................................................................................................................... I-1
J PEGAsys Network Interface Card ............................................................................................. J-1
K Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ K-1
L Remote Display Control Module and Remote Display Module .................................................. L-1
M Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. M-1
N Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM) ........................................................................... N-1
O Central Station Operation .......................................................................................................... O-1
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX TITLE PAGE
viii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE TITLE PAGE
1-1 PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram .......................................................................................... 1-0
1-2 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2
1-3 Display Module Assembly .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2
1-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-3
1-6 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-7 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1-8 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-9 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-10 Agent Release Output Module................................................................................................... 1-4
1-11 City Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-12 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-13 Module Mounting Dimensions ................................................................................................... 1-5
1-14 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5
1-15 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-16 SmartOne Detection Device ...................................................................................................... 1-6
1-17 4-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-18 6-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-19 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6
1-20 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7
1-21 Air Duct Housing........................................................................................................................ 1-7
1-22 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone......................................................................................................... 1-7
1-23 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1-24 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 1-7
1-25 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD........................................................................... 1-7
1-26 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8
1-27 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8
2-1 System Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-3 Active Alarms Example.............................................................................................................. 2-7
2-4 Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication ............................................................. 2-11
2-5 Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example ................................................................................. 2-11
2-6 Output Module Address Scheme ............................................................................................... 2-13
2-7 RCU Registration Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-15
3-1 Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System............................................................................ 3-1
3-2 Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ............................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Central Control Module, Details ................................................................................................. 3-2
3-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details........................................................................................ 3-3
3-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details .................................................................................. 3-4
3-6 Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details................................................................................................ 3-5
3-7 Signal Output Module, Details ................................................................................................... 3-6
3-8 Relay Output Module, Details .................................................................................................... 3-7
3-9 Agent Release Output Module, Details...................................................................................... 3-7
3-10 City Tie Module, Details ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-11 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-12 ATM Module .............................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-13 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-14 Typical Detector ......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-15 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-10
3-16 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10
ix
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont.)
FIGURE TITLE PAGE
3-17 DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................ 3-10
3-18 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3-19 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone......................................................................................................... 3-11
3-20 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 3-11
3-21 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD........................................................................... 3-11
3-22 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11
3-23 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12
5-1 Single Loop Installation.............................................................................................................. 5-2
5-2 Multi-Loop Installation ................................................................................................................ 5-2
7-1 CCP Installation Drawing ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 Back Plate, Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies ...................................................... 7-2
7-3 Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies ............................................................................................. 7-2
7-4 Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards ...................................................................................... 7-2
7-5 Installation for Multi-Loop .......................................................................................................... 7-3
7-6 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram..................................................................................... 7-4
7-7 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ............................................ 7-5
7-8 RS-485 Connection ................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-9 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-10 Conduit to CCP.......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-11 Shielded Wire to CCP ............................................................................................................... 7-7
7-12 Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections......................................................................................... 7-7
7-13 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections......................................................................................... 7-7
7-14 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators.......................................................... 7-8
7-15 Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection .......................................................................................... 7-8
7-16 CCM Printer Port ....................................................................................................................... 7-10
x
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE TITLE PAGE
1-1 System Specifications................................................................................................................ 1-8
2-1 Controls and Indicators.............................................................................................................. 2-2
2-2 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-8
2-3 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-4 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-9
2-5 Test Menu Functions ................................................................................................................. 2-10
3-1 Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors ......................................................................................... 3-5
3-2 Approved Release Output Devices............................................................................................ 3-7
5-1 Troubleshooting Index ............................................................................................................... 5-1
5-2 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 5-3
6-1 PEGAsys System Parts List ...................................................................................................... 6-1
7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 7-3
7-2 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly ................. 7-5
xi
SAFETY SUMMARY
Note: Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability.
WARNING
!
Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all
sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing
and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to
install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.
CAUTION
!
System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product
must be tested in accordance with NFPA-72 (2002) Chapter 10 after any programming operation or change
in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system
components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change
must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least
10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices,
must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0to 49C and at a relative humidity of 85% (non-
condensing) @ 30C. However, the useful life of the systems standby batteries and the electronic
components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity variations. Therefore, it is
recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room
temperature of 60to 80F.
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when
subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning
transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. The use of overhead or outside
aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult
with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.
Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can
damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure.
When possible, make all cable entries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will
not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location.
Do not over tighten screw terminals. Over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal
contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap
before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive
packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the control unit.
Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must
be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. System operation and
reliability depend upon proper installation.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Note: While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insur-
ance!
An automatic fire alarm systemtypically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible
warning devices, and a fire alarm control unit with remote notification capabilitycan provide early warning of a develop-
ing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
xii
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A
second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detec-
torsboth ionization and photoelectric typeshave sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind
of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper stor-
age of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or
partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.
A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby
batteries only for a specified time.
Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of
each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist.
Auxiliary equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only
equipment listed for service with your control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily disabled.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring
should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each
device. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or local fire codes.
Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept.
GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES
Note: The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety
precautions in this section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used
by trained distributors/technicians. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live
equipment while holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should
not be held when taking measurements.
FIRST AID
Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:
1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA
and local regulatory requirements.
2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work
is in progress.
3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that the system is not energized.
4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rulers, flashlights, metallic pencils or any other objects having ex-
posed conductive material.
5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use voltage range higher than the expected voltage.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
January 2002
PEGAsys
1-0 76-100016-001
F
i
g
u
r
e

1
-
1
.

P
E
G
A
s
y
s

S
y
s
t
e
m
,

O
v
e
r
a
l
l

D
i
a
g
r
a
m
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
a
b
l
e
S
u
p
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n
S
y
s
t
e
m
A
b
o
r
t
D
e
v
i
c
e
P
U
S
H
/
H
O
L
D
S
U
P
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
S
Y
S
T
E
M
A
B
O
R
T
P
U
S
H
P
U
L
L
R
F
I
R
E
A
L
A
R
M
F
I
R
E
A
L
A
R
M
R
S
-
4
8
5
A
l
a
r
m
N
o
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
A
p
p
l
i
a
n
c
e
s
1-1 July 2003
PEGAsys
76-100016-001
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the operation, maintenance, trouble-
shooting, parts listing and installation information neces-
sary to support the PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression
Control and Fire Alarm System.
Note: This manual is to be used by trained distributors
only. The entire manual should be read and fully
understood prior to installation. Refer to Figure 1-
1 for the PEGAsys System overall diagram.
1-1.1 System Description
PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which
can be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signal-
ing and releasing device service. The system is a micro-
processor based design for use with intelligent detectors
and loop devices.
The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices.
These devices are typically smoke detectors, contact in-
put devices, relay outputs and signal output modules which
represent a single fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each
device contains its own data transceiver, micro controller,
4K of memory and applicable algorithms which allows each
device to operate independently of the control system.
These unique devices have the ability to analyze informa-
tion, make decisions and store information within them-
selves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system using
the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four
wire (Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The
PEGAsys can support up to 255 device addresses per loop,
with a maximum of eight (8) loops, for a total of 2,040 in-
telligent device points per system.
The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of
auxiliary devices, such as relays, audible/visual indicating
signal devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The
system also supports the use of serial printers which pro-
vide hard copy of system status information.
There are three versions of the PEGAsys currently in ser-
vice. These three versions are identified as:
Pre-Network,
Networkable, and
Networkable and directly-integrable with ORION
XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detectors (HSSDs).
Pre-networked systems have operating firmware in the
Central Control Module (CCM) that ranged from Version
48.0 to Version 6X.X. All pre-networked systems must now
have Version 60.0, or higher, operating firmware. Pre-net-
worked systems are not covered in this manual.
Networkable systems have a modified CCM that can ac-
cept a Network Interface Card (NIC) for peer-to-peer con-
trol unit operations, and can accommodate Remote Display
Modules (RDMs), Remote Display Control Modules
(RDCMs) and ATM Series Driver Modules (ATM-L/R).
Networkable systems have CCM Version 7X.X firmware.
Networkable systems that are directly-integrable with
ORION XT HSSDs have Version 8X.X CCM firmware.
1-1.2 System Components
The system is comprised of three major components, as
shown in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) which
communicates with the field devices and drives output
devices such as alarm signals that communicate with cen-
tral stations and various types of control equipment; a dis-
play panel located on the CCP that provides system status
LEDs and Control Switches; and an 80-character LCD that
provides alphanumeric display of system status informa-
tion.
The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N
76-100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module
(CCM) assembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) mod-
ule and one power supply assembly. Optionally the sys-
tem can add a motherboard assembly which allows for the
installation of optional output modules. An auxiliary power
supply module can be added which increases the base
system power supply capacity to 8.0 Amps at 24 Vdc.
In multi-loop form, the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000-
600) consists of a CCM, one (1) power-supply assembly,
one (1) RX/TX module and one (1) multi-loop motherboard
mounted in the enclosure. The unique multi-loop
motherboard provides the ability to connect up to eight (8)
RX/TX modules to the system which allows for a full 2,040
addressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML
system.
Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to
be expanded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same di-
mensions as that of the main enclosure, with the absence
of the window in the door. There are optional backplanes
that install in the expansion enclosure. This allows the num-
ber of output modules and system power supplies to be
expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility and ex-
pansion, enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to
the system. See Appendix B for further system expansion
details.
1-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each
component used in the PEGAsys system. For functional
descriptions of each component, see Chapter 3 of this
manual.
1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM)
The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is com-
prised of two (2) printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies,
the display module and the main processor module. The
CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the sys-
tem modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It
receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, pro-
cesses the data based on pre-programmed instructions
and transmits output commands to the output modules,
field devices and display module(s).
1-2.2 Display Module
The display module assembly, attached to the main pro-
cessor PCB, provides the system with the operator inter-
face for control switches, system status LEDs, system
trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80-character (2 x 40) LCD dis-
play and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used
for entering the security password and navigating through
the user menus. The system buzzer provides two (2) dis-
tinctly different signaling patterns for audible warning of
system alarms and troubles.
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
R
Display Reset
Switch
P
L
G
2
J
K
1
J
K
2
P
L
G
3
S
W
1
P
L
G
2
J
K
3
P
L
G
1
PRINT PORT
DS1
0
V
2
4
V
D
C
E
A
R
T
H
F
A
U
L
T
S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
A
U
L
T
T
B
6
BUZZER
Processor
Port
Display
Port
PC Port
Display Trouble
LED
24 Vdc from
Power Supply
Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
R
Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly
1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software inter-
face between the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX
receives control requests from the CCM, and establishes
communications with the field devices. The RX/TX receives
status changes from the field devices and reports these
changes to the CCM. The RX/TX, shown in Figure 1-4, is
capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent de-
vices and complies with the wiring requirements of NFPA
Style 4, 6 and 7 (with the use of the loop isolator devices).
Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit T tapping or
branch circuitry.
1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010)
is comprised of a PCB assembly and an AC/DC switching
power supply unit. The switching power supply unit pro-
vides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc from the 120/240 Vac input power.
The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
provides the system with:
Battery charging and supervision
AC power supervision
24 Vdc supervision
Battery load test
24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)
Auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs
Loop Isolator
for Style 7
Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
1-3 July 2003
PEGAsys
76-100016-001
Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard
The basic motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is
an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) output mod-
ule circuit board assemblies. The motherboard is mounted
to the back of the system enclosure and/or the auxiliary
enclosures. It distributes 24 Vdc power and bus communi-
cations to the output modules. The bus communications
are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connec-
tion. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply
via a two-conductor wiring harness. The motherboard
mounts to standoffs on the back of the main and expan-
sion enclosures with screws which are provided.
R1 W1
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
TB1
+24V
RET
TB2
485B
485A
SIG GND
COM ALM
COM TBL
J9
RS-485
Figure 1-6. Basic Motherboard
1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard
The multi-loop motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017-
001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8)
RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven
(7) output module circuit board assemblies. The ML
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the
main system enclosure. It distributes 24 Vdc power, CCM-
RX/TX communications for up to eight (8) RX/TX mod-
ules and bus communications to the output modules. The
bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone
cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection con-
nects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX commu-
nications. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power
supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. The allowable
combinations of RX/TX and output modules that can be
used with a Multi-Loop Motherboard are as follows:
) s ( X T / X R f o . o N s e l u d o M t u p t u O f o . o N
2 r o 1 7 1
3 6 1
4 5 1
5 4 1
6 3 1
7 2 1
8 1
W1
J1 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J2
TB9
+24V
RET
TB10
485A
SIG GND
COM ALM
COM TBL
485B
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8
TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1
TB11
+24V
RET
JP10
RS-232
JP9
RS-485
Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop Motherboard
1-2.7 Output Modules
The optional output modules allow the PEGAsys system
to interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxil-
iary devices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC
systems, elevator recall, power shut down, remote annun-
ciators, agent/sprinkler release system and any other con-
trol type output which may need to be interfaced to the
system.
The output modules plug into the motherboard assembly
located on the backplate of the system enclosure. Each
module occupies one slot in a motherboard assembly. The
modules and the CCM communicate over the RS-485
based bus, which uses a six-conductor, phone-type cable
to connect the CCM to the motherboard.
The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support
a maximum of sixteen (16) output modules, in any combi-
nation. However, no more than eight (8) of any one type of
module can be used. The system is limited to one City-Tie
Module.
The PEGAsys multi-loop panel has the ability to support a
maximum of twenty-three (23) output modules, in any com-
bination in the system. However, no more than eight (8) of
any one type of module can be used, and the system is
limited to one City-Tie Module.
The following paragraphs describe each available output
module in greater detail.
1-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Alarm Sounder/Signal Output cards, thus provid-
ing thirty-two (32) possible Class B, Style "Y" signal cir-
cuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card is equipped
with supervised 24 Vdc outputs which can operate as Class
B, Style Y or Class A, Style Z indicating circuits (see
Figure 1-8).
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
1
Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module
1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to thirty-
two (32) relays. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card is
equipped with four (4) Form C, dry-contact relay outputs.
The ability to isolate an individual relay output is provided
through the system operator menu.
Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module
1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) agent release output modules, providing up to
eight (8) release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal out-
puts on those modules.
Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module
1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE
The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection
and operation for local energy or shunt type master boxes
and reverse polarity styles of off-premises reporting.
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
2
-
0
0
1
Figure 1-11. City Tie Module
1-5 July 2003
PEGAsys
76-100016-001
1-2.8 Remote Display/Control Modules
The remote display control modules permit system events
to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accom-
plished, from more than one location in a facility. Two styles
of remote display modules are available; Model RDCM is
a duplicate of the PEGAsys Display/Control Module and
allows full operator intervention and system control, while
Model RDM is a display-only module that only permits the
viewing of the current system events.
SYSTEM
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
3
8
AC POWER
ALARM
PRE-ALARM
6
1
7
2
SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM TROUBLE
System Status Display
SILENCE
9
4
0
5
SILENCE
SCROLL
R
Figure 1-12. RDCM Keypad
1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphi-
cal annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to
be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit. Two types of driver
modules can be used, Models ATM-L and ATM-R.
The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides the
PEGAsys Control Unit with up to 32 programmable, su-
pervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular annuncia-
tors, along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5
system-level input circuits for functional switches.
The system-level LEDs correspond to the following gen-
eral conditions: Module Power, Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Alarm
Silence, Supervisory, and Trouble.
The input circuits for functional switches provide for the
following operator intervention: System Reset, Event Ac-
knowledgment, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, and Lamp Test.
The Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module can activate up to
32 programmable, supervised relays.
The PEGAsys supports up to 16 ATM-L or ATM-R Driver
Modules, or any combination of these two modules, along
with RDCMs and RDMs, that does not exceed 31 total
addresses.
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Lamp Test
Com
Ack
Reset
Silence
Drill
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
LK19
LK21
LK18
LK20
LK23 LK22
LK25 LK24
LK27 LK26
LK29 LK28
LK31 LK30
LK32
LK17
LK15 LK16
LK13 LK14
LK11 LK12
LK10
LK8
LK6
LK4
LK2
LK9
LK7
LK5
LK3
LK1
Trouble
Sup.
Sil. Out
Pre Alm
Alarm
Pwr On
A
B
+24 V
Com
PS Flt
W1
Out B
Out A
In B
In A
S2 S1
ATM-L/R
Earth Gnd
1.375 5.175
0.188
4.625
8.000
5.000
Note:
Maintain a minumum one-half (1/2) inch clearance around ATM-L
and ATM-R Modules when installed in mounting enclosure.
Figure 1-13. Module Mounting Dimensions
1-2.10 Network Interface Card
The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys
Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-to-
peer network for annunciation, event output control, and
operator intervention.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
D
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
TB3
B2IA2
TB4
B2NA2
TB2
B1NA1
TB1
B1IA1
U11
C26
U16
1
U17
1
RV2
RV1
RV3
R26
K1
U18
1
U20
1
R
2
1
U21
1
R41
Q2
R40
Q3
C
1
0
R
4
3
R
4
2
R18 U6
1
U14
1
C8
R7
Q4
C9
U19 1
U15
1
Q1
C7
R1
R44
R17
R
V
1
1
R
2
4
R
V
1
2
E
8
R
V
1
0 RV8 RV6
E
4
E
7
R
2
5
R
5
R
6
R20
R22
RV5
RV4
E
3
E
2
E
5
E
6
R
4
R
3
R36
RV9
RV7
K2
K4
R
2
3
CR2
K3
CR1
U5
1
C
1
8
R
1
3
R
2
U4
1
U8
1
R29
R38
C24
R19
C17
+
R27
U9
1
R32
R12
U10
1
R28
C22
C16
C15
R31
C25 C
1
R
1
5
R
3
3
R34
C14
R
1
4
U2
1
C
2
3
U7
1
C20
+
C
2
E
1
C11
C5
C3 +
C4
+
R45
U13
1
R46
C27
U12
1
C12
C
R
3
Y1
TP2
+5
TP6
I2
TP4
N1
TP5
N2
TP3
I1
U3
1
C13
R10
TP1
GND
J1 DS2
N1
DS4
N2
DS3
I2
DS1
I1
Figure 1-14. Network Interface Card
1-6 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
1-2.11 Standby Batteries
Space is provided within the central control panel enclo-
sure for up to two (2) 12 V, 33 AH, sealed lead-acid batter-
ies used for 24-, 60- or 90-hour standby operation. If
additional batteries are required, an optional battery en-
closure is available. The enclosure (Figure 1-15) is a heavy
duty steel cabinet that can house up to two (2) 40 AH bat-
teries. For installation information, see Paragraph 7-9.1.
STANDBY BATTERIES
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
KIDDE
Figure 1-15. Battery Enclosure
1-2.12 Intelligent Loop Devices
The SmartOne

Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices

provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat
detection, and necessary monitoring and control functions
required by advanced fire alarm systems. The following
paragraphs describe each available intelligent detection
device.
Figure 1-16. SmartOne Detection Device
1-2.12.1 SMARTONE IONIZATION DETECTOR
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true dis-
tributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based
smoke detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.12.2 SMARTONE PHOTOELECTRIC
DETECTOR
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detector provides true
distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-
based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.12.3 SMARTONE HEAT DETECTOR
The SmartOne Thermistor heat detector provides true dis-
tributed-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based
heat detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases
The SmartOne series of detection devices use universal
mounting bases which are available in three styles:
1. The 4SB is a sub-floor style 4-inch base with an out-
side diameter that matches that of the low profile
SmartOne detectors. The 4SB, shown in Figure 1-17,
mounts to standard 3 inch/3.5-inch, or 100mm electri-
cal boxes.
Figure 1-17. 4-inch Detector Base
2. The 6SB model, shown in Figure 1-18, is a tradition-
ally styled detector base with an integral trim ring which
provides coverage for any inconsistencies between the
electrical box and ceiling material. The 6SB mounts to
standard 3 inch/3.5 inch/4-inch electrical boxes.
Figure 1-18. 6-inch Detector Base
1-2.14 Addressable Contact Input Device
The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) al-
lows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire
alarm devices (i.e., water flow and tamper switches) to the
PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used to in-
terface to manual alarm, manual release and abort sta-
tions.
M
O
D
E
L
A
I
,
N
/
O
I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S
S
E
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
8
-
0
0
1
S
m
a
r
t
O
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
I
D
D
E
-
F
E
N
W
A
L
,
I
N
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
I
N
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0

F
7654321
0
6
-
2
3
5
5
7
8
-
0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
8
A
S W
B
S W
( + )
L E D
( - )
L E D
A
L
L
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
Figure 1-19. Addressable Contact Input Device
1-7 July 2003
PEGAsys
76-100016-001
1-2.15 Addressable Relay Output Device
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001)
provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry-contact
interface for remote control applications.
M
O
D
E
L
A
O
I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S
S
E
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
4
-
0
0
1
S
m
a
r
t
O
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
I
D
D
E
-
F
E
N
W
A
L
,
I
N
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
I
N
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0

F
7654321
0
6
-
2
3
5
5
7
7
-
0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
N / C C O M N / O
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
5
-
7
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
1
-
4
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
LED
Figure 1-20. Addressable Relay Output Device
1-2.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting
particles of combustion products in air-handling systems.
DUCT
DETECTOR
MODEL
DH-2000
R
Figure 1-21. Air Duct Housing
1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices
The SmartOne series of loop isolation devices, shown in
Figures 1-22 through 1-24, offer optional loop isolation
which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions
(NFPA Style 7.0).
Figure 1-22. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
R
X
/
T
X
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
S H O R T - 1 S H O R T - 2
DS2 DS1
J1
FOR MODULE INSTALL.
P/N 76-100016-001
INSTALLATION MANUAL
REFER TO
PROCEDURES
Laboratories Inc.
Underwriters
R
LISTED
R
Figure 1-23. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
Laboratories
Underwriters
R
LISTED
Figure 1-24. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount
1-2.18 ORION XT Interface Module
The PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) permits
direct connection of an ORION XT High-Sensitivity Smoke
Detector (HSSD) to a signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys
Control Unit. The ORION XT reports pre-alarm, alarm and
trouble status by individual location (i.e., address) to the
PEGAsys Control Unit via the PALM.
The PALM is housed within the ORION XT HSSD enclo-
sure and plugs into a receptacle on the Detector's printed
circuit board.
Figure 1-25. PALM Interface Module for
ORION XT HSSD
1-8 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table 1-1. System Specifications
M E T I S C I T S I R E T C A R A H C
y l p p u S r e w o P
: t n e m e r i u q e R r e w o P * z H 0 6 / 0 5 , V 0 2 2 / 0 2 1
) e l u d o M r e P ( t u p n I . S . P
s p m A 9 . 1 , c a V 0 2 1
s p m A 5 9 . , c a V 0 2 2
) e l u d o M r e P ( t u p t u O . S . P s p m A 4 , c d V 4 2
: t u p t u O r e g r a h C . t a B s p m A 3 , c d V 4 . 6 2
) 2 ( : s t u p t u O . x u A h c a e s p m A 5 . 1 , c d V 4 2
M C C
: t u p t u O l a n g i S s p m A 2 , c d V 4 2
: t u p t u O e s a e l e R s p m A 2 , c d V 4 2
: g n i t a R t c a t n o C y a l e R c d V 0 3 @ p m A 1
: g n i t a R y a l e R e l b u o r T c d V 0 3 @ p m A 1
e l u d o M X T / X R
: e g a t l o V . x a M c d V 4 . 6 2
: e g a t l o V . n i M c d V 0 . 9 1
: e c n a t i c a p a C e n i L . x a M F u 5 2 . 0
: e c n a t s i s e R e n i L . x a M s m h O 6 2
e l b a s s e r d d A . x a M
: s e c i v e D
X T / X R r e p 5 5 2
e l u d o M e s a e l e R
t u p t u O e s a e l e R c d V 4 2 @ s p m A 2
t u p t u O l a n g i S h c a e c d V 4 2 @ s p m A 2
: e p y T t u p t u O e s a e l e R
s d i o n e l o s g n i s a e l e r f o e l b a p a C
) r e l k n i r p s d n a n o i s s e r p p u s (
e l u d o M e l b i d u A l a n g i S
: s t u p t u O l a n g i S
r o " Y " e l y t S , B s s a l C ) 4 (
" Z " e l y t S A s s a l C ) 2 (
h c a e c d V 4 2 @ s p m A 2
e l u d o M y a l e R
: g n i t a R t c a t n o C
, s t c a t n o C C m r o F ) 4 (
r o c d V 0 3 @ s p m A 2
c a V 0 2 1 @ p m A 1
e l u d o M e i T y t i C
: t c a t n o C t n u h S e v i t s i s e R , c d V 4 2 @ s p m A 5
: t u p t u O y g r e n E l a c o L
, c d V 4 2 @ . x a m A m 0 0 5
d e t i m i L t n e r r u C
: y r o s i v r e p u S y g r e n E l a c o L A m 1 1
: d a o L y g r e n E l a c o L
t n e r r u C p i r T x o B r e t s a M
l a c i p y t s p m A 5 2 . 0
C A d n a r e w o p m e t s y s l a t o t r o f A x i d n e p p A o t r e f e R : e t o N *
. s t n e m e r i u q e r t i u c r i c h c n a r b
1-2.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module
The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
PEGAsys Control Unit. The AAM transmits pre-alarm,
alarm, and trouble signals to the Central Control Module
via the RX/TXs signaling line circuit. Alternatively, the AAM
can be configured to transmit an overheat signal to the
Control Unit for those applications that require excessively-
high temperature indications.
TM
Figure 1-26. Addressable AlarmLine Module
1-2.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits
notification appliances to be controlled via commands is-
sued from the PEGAsys Control Units signaling line cir-
cuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical
box.
A B B A
- + - + + - - +
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
DEVICE
ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ AUX./AUDIO MODE
SETTINGS
PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
_ _ _ _
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ADDRESS #
SETTINGS
AUDIO
P1=1&2
MODE
S1=3 ON
AUX. IN
+ - + -
TROUBLE
CKT. -
OUTPUT CKT.
- + +
AUX./AUDIO MODE
AUXILIARY
MODE
P1=2&3
S1=1&2 ON
PC LINE
A B A B
DEVICE
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
FM
APPROVED
R L
U
TM
Figure 1-27. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-1
CHAPTER 2
OPERATION
2-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the PEGAsys system controls
and indicators located on the display panel. It also describes
the operating procedures and menu system.
2-1.1 Modes of Operation
There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation:
1. In the default operation, the panel will be set to latch
all alarm inputs in the system. The latching operation
will not allow the loop input devices to generate an
"alarm off" signal that would possibly interrupt a dis-
charge time delay sequence. To return the panel to
normal, the "RESET" button will need to be pushed.
2. The second mode of operation is non-latching. This
option can be enabled using the PEGAsys Configura-
tion Software (PCS) to define if a loop device input is
to be non-latching. The non-latching operation will al-
low the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off"
signal to the panel. When this signal is received, the
panel would interrupt the discharge time delay se-
quence of operation. However, all outputs that had
been activated previous to the "alarm off" signal will
remain on and latched until the panel is reset.
The advantage of offering latching or non-latching op-
eration per loop input device is that it allows the in-
staller/designer to customize the system. This allows
the intermixing of latching and non-latching devices to
protect critical areas where both types may be speci-
fied.
Figure 2-1. System Front Panel
When an alarm returns to a normal state (alarm off), the
buzzer will sound in a pulsed fashion. The "alarm off" con-
dition must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. Dur-
ing the "alarm off" condition, the audible device provides
no sound. The following summarizes the buzzer opera-
tion:
Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON
signal,
Alarm OFF is indicated by a -second ON -second
OFF signal, and
Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON, and
1 second OFF continuous beeping.
Every individual change of status must be individually ac-
knowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> (acknowledge)
button to silence the Audible device.
2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are lo-
cated on the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The dis-
play panel is mounted on top of the CCM. To gain access
to the CCM, the panel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists
controls and indicators for the display unit, listing name
and functional description.
2-2.1 LCD Display
The display panel contains an 80-character (2 x 40) alpha-
numeric display. This LCD display is used to present sys-
tem status. In the procedure section of this chapter there
are several simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD dis-
play readouts will be used to aid users in the operation of
the system.
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
R
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-2
Table 2-1. Controls and Indicators
D E L N O I T C N U F
R E W O P C A
s e t a c i d n i , f f o n e h W . r e w o p t u p n i C A g n i v i e c e r s i m e t s y s e h t t a h t s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
a o t d e h c t i w s s a h m e t s y s e h t d n a ) n o i t i d n o c e l b u o r t ( d e r r u c c o s a h e r u l i a f r e w o p t u p n i C A n a
. n o i t i d n o c y b d n a t s y r e t t a b
M R A L A . e c i v e d t u p n i n a y b d e t r o p e r n e e b s a h n o i t i d n o c m r a l a n a s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
M R A L A - E R P
f o l e v e l a d e s n e s s a h D S S H n a r o r o t c e t e d t a e h r o e k o m s a s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
. t n i o p t e s m r a l a - e r p s t i s d e e c x e h c i h w t a e h r o e k o m s
E L B U O R T M E T S Y S . m e t s y s e h t n i s t s i x e n o i t i d n o c e l b u o r t a s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
Y R O S I V R E P U S
t u p n i - m e t s y s a y b d e t r o p e r n e e b s a h n o i t i d n o c y r o s i v r e p u s a s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
. t u p n i y r o s i v r e p u s r o f d e m m a r g o r p e c i v e d
E C N E L I S . d e c n e l i s n e e b e v a h s t u p t u o e l b i d u a / l a n g i s e h t s e t a c i d n i , d e t a n i m u l l i n e h W
H C T I W S N O I T C N U F
E G D E L W O N K C A M E T S Y S
, e l b u o r t ) g n i h c t a l - n o n r o f t e s s i e c i v e d t u p n i f i F F O m r a l a ( N O m r a l a n a r e t f a d e s s e r p n e h W
e l b i d u a s ' t i n u l o r t n o c e h t s e c n e l i s t i , d e r u c c o s a h n o i t i d n o c N O m r a l a - e r p r o , y r o s i v r e p u s
r o t a c i d n i D E L " M R A L A - E R P " r o , " Y R O S I V R E P U S " , " E L B U O R T " , " M R A L A " e h T . r e z z u b
s n o i t i d n o c t n e u q e s b u S . d e g d e l w o n k c a n e e b s a h n o i t i d n o c e h t t a h t e t a c i d n i o t y d a e t s s w o l g
. e c n e u q e s e v o b a e h t d n u o s e r o t t i n u l o r t n o c e h t e s u a c l l i w
T E S E R M E T S Y S
: m e t s y s e h t , d e r a e l c d n a d e g d e l w o n k c a n e e b e v a h s m r a l a e v i t c a l l a r e t f a d e s s e r p n e h W
s r o t c e t e d e r i w 4 r e w o p o t d e s u s t u p t u o c d V 4 2 y r a i l i x u a s t e s e R
. s n o i t i d n o c m r a l a d e h c t a l l l a s t e s e R
. e t a t s l a m r o n r i e h t o t s y a l e r l l a s n r u t e R
. y a l p s i d l a u s i v e h t n o " t e s e R m e t s y S " s y a l p s i D
. f f o r o t a c i d n i " M R A L A " e h t s n r u T
d n a s r o t c e t e d D S S H d n a e k o m s e r i w - 4 t e s e r o t e c n o d e s s e r p e b t s u m n o t t u b t e s e r e h T
t i n U l o r t n o C e h t t e s e r o t e c n o
E C N E L I S
h c i h w s t u p t u o l a n g i s m e t s y s e h t s e c n e l i s t i , m r a l a t n e r r u c g n i g d e l w o n k c a r e t f a d e s s e r p n e h W
t a h t e t a c i d n i o t s e t a n i m u l l i r o t a c i d n i " E C N E L I S " e h T . e l b a e c n e l i s s a d e m m a r g o r p n e e b e v a h
e h t t c e f f a t o n s e o d h c t i w s " E C N E L I S " e h t g n i s s e r P . d e c n e l i s n e e b e v a h s t u p t u o l a n g i s e h t
. s u t a t s t u p t u o y a l e r
L L O R C S
o t D C L e h t e s u a c l l i w , n o i t i d n o c y r o s i v r e p u s r o , e l b u o r t , m r a l a e v i t c a n a g n i r u d d e s s e r p n e h W
r o y r o s i v r e p u s w o l l a t o n l l i w n o i t i d n o c m r a l a n A . ) s ( r e f f u b t n e v e e v i t c a e h t h g u o r h t l l o r c s
. d e w e i v e b o t r e f f u b s e l b u o r t e h t w o l l a t o n l l i w n o i t i d n o c y r o s i v r e p u S . d e w e i v e b o t s e l b u o r t
) 0 - 1 ( D A P Y E K C I R E M U N . m e t s y s u n e m e h t o t n i n o i t a m r o f n i m e t s y s d n a d r o w s s a p r e t n e o t e s U
E C A P S K C A B . s e i r t n e g n o r w t c e r r o c o t d n a m e t s y s u n e m e h t t i x e o t e s U
N R U T E R . m e t s y s u n e m e h t g n i s u n e h w y e k r e t n E e h t s a d e s U
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-3
2-2.2 Audible Device
The Display Panel also contains an audible device which
generates two separate audible tones: one for alarms and
one for all other events. This device sounds continuously
when a new alarm condition is received until the condition
is acknowledged. It also sounds intermittently when a
trouble, supervisory or pre-alarm condition is received un-
til the condition is acknowledged.
2-3 SYSTEM SECURITY
The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of pro-
gram protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user
can only access the system by entering a valid password.
Typical valid passwords consist of three or four charac-
ters, but may be up to eight characters in length.
2-3.1 Levels of Security
The three security levels are: Level One (system owner),
Level Two (system installer) and System Manufacturer (the
highest security levelreserved for the system manufac-
turer). Passwords consist of numeric characters (0-9) and
allow access to the system from the integral keypad of the
CCM. Passwords help to lock out any possible entry to the
menus through the CCM keypad. Alphanumeric charac-
ters can only be used with the PCS program. However,
they will lock out any possible entry to the menus from the
keypad if used.
If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular
application, it is recommended that the Level One pass-
word be numeric and the Level Two password be alpha-
numeric so as to allow the user to retrieve system
information (system information lists) and also prevent a
user from changing any programmed system parameters.
2-3.2 Default Passwords
The PEGAsys system provides protection from unautho-
rized entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of
default passwords: Level One and Level Two. This feature
provides two separate passwords, which increase the se-
curity of the system. Default passwords are set when the
system is shipped from Kidde. These default passwords
are:
Level One = 987
Level Two = 1865
These default passwords are valid until other passwords
are programmed into the system.
2-3.3 Entering Passwords
The password entry procedure is listed below:
1. Verify that the system status is displayed.
2. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
3. Type in three or four digit password into keypad. En-
sure a pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed.
Note: Use the default password if a new password has
not been set.
4. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2-4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The following step-by-step procedure is for initial power-
up of the CCP.
1. Perform the installation checkout procedure in Chap-
ter 7 of this manual.
2. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify
that the display reads "Main Processor Power On".
Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously.
3. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the
audible device is silenced.
4. Verify that the display reads as follows:
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
5. After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as fol-
lows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
Note: For multi-loop systems only. The above and be-
low RX/TX messages will repeat themselves for
each RX/TX module installed in the system. The
above message will be displayed while the sys-
tem is initializing itself. This initialization can take
up to 90 seconds.
To clear the below RX/TX message, use the
AutoLearn function from the menu function or up-
load the configuration from the PCS program. If
using PCS software, verify that the correct num-
ber of RX/TX loops is enabled in the Loops Topic
of the configuration file prior to uploading.
RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON
RX/TX LOOP 1
6. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators
are lit.
7. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in
accordance with the procedure in Chapter 7.
8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approximately
one minute the display will momentarily read:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
9. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date.
10. Set time and date as follows:
a. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-4
b. Type in the default Level One password (987).
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
d. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display
reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
e. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return ( ) key. Verify
that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM 2:PM
f. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for
PM).
g. When the date menu appears, set the date using
the same procedure as for time setting, described
in steps d and e above.
Note: If there has been a mistake in the entered data,
press the backspace key as many times as re-
quired to return to the incorrect data, then re-en-
ter data from that point.
11. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The
system is now ready for loop device registration and
programming which is covered in this chapter.
2-5 SYSTEM MENUS
PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu struc-
ture has been implemented to aid users with system oper-
ating functions. The following paragraphs describe the
menu structure, accessing the menu, exiting the menu and
menu functions. Figure 2-1 shows the system menu struc-
ture.
2-5.1 Menu Structure
The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu
and multiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may
also contain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu dis-
plays after a valid password is entered. The top level menu
can be accessed from any sub-level menu almost any-
time by pressing the backspace key located on the key-
pad.
Note: The top level menu may not be available by using
the backspace key while certain types of program-
ming are being performed.
It is possible to access a previous, higher level menu from
a lower level menu by pressing the backspace key.
The choices of available sub menus after a valid pass-
word has been entered correspond to the security level
password that has been entered.
The main menu for the Level One, Level Two and Manu-
facturer security level is:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can
be selected by pressing the numeric key of the systems
keypad, which corresponds to the desired function (e.g.,
to select the LIST function from the main menu, press the
number two (2) key on the system keypad). Lower level
functions may also be selected from sub-level menus us-
ing the numeric keys.
2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus
Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3.
2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus
To exit the system's menus, perform the following steps:
1. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to
reach the top level menu, shown below:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the backspace key. Verify that the system re-
turns to standby. The display should read:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD-YR
40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE
Note: When exiting the system menus, if the system is
normal the display panel should show the time and
date as shown in the above step.
2-5.4 Menu Functions
Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description
of typical functions that can be performed using the
PEGAsys systems menus. In addition, the tables provide
the security access levels and a keystroke formula for each
function. The keystroke formula is a sequence of num-
bers that is entered via the system keypad to access a
particular function. These formulas provide the path from
the main menu to the desired function. Formulas are pro-
vided for each access level. After the formula is entered,
some of the functions require the return key to be pressed
to start implementing the function.
Most functions will require additional data to be entered to
implement the function, such as a device address or de-
sired alarm threshold.
2-5.4.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION
The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the opera-
tor to isolate field devices and output modules. Isolating
any device immediately places the system in a trouble con-
dition and initiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout
with the time, date and device isolated. The feature is typi-
cally used to temporarily isolate auxiliary devices during a
system test.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-5
Figure 2-2. Menu Structure
PLACE FOLDOUT
SHEET HERE
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-6
BLANK FOR
FOLDOUT SHEET
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-7
2-5.4.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION
The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to
list various system parameters. All lists are real-time ac-
tual system conditions which are displayed and printed with
the time and date.
2-5.4.3 SET MENU FUNCTION
The set menu function permits the operator to program
various system parameters within the system. A few ex-
amples are shown in Table 2-4.
2-5.4.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION
The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the
operator to test an individual or a group of field devices.
On command, a detector or contact input device can be
tested, and results will be printed and displayed at the
Central Control Panel. The test procedure in the device is
activated by imposing a signal within the device that will
cause an alarm output. The Control Panel verifies that an
alarm output is generated, and reports Test Result OK
for each device.
2-6 MODES OF OPERATION
The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each
mode has different indications and actions required. The
following paragraphs describe each mode, indications and
actions to be taken, if required.
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode
This is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no
alarm, trouble or supervisory conditions exist in the sys-
tem. The system display will show the time and date. In
this mode, the LCD could read:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The system provides an option which allows the System
Status Normal message to be replaced with a display of
battery charging voltage and current for the system standby
batteries. For example:
PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate
that the systems main power source is normal.
Note: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is pos-
sible for the 80-character display to show data
other than the time and date. This occurs when
the system menus are being accessed either lo-
cally or remotely through one of its serial ports.
This condition will be indicated by the menu se-
lections being displayed on the display panel.
In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LEDs will be
illuminated other than the AC POWER.
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode
The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices)
has detected an alarm condition, such as smoke/heat
above the alarm threshold level. There are two types of
alarms which can occur:
1. Device AlarmAn alarm in which a device has com-
municated the alarm status properly to the Central Con-
trol Panel, by providing the alarmed device address
for indication to the operator.
2. Zone AlarmAn alarm condition detected by one or
several devices, but which cannot be reported by a
specific device due to a malfunction in communica-
tions between the system and the alarmed device(s).
This is a redundant feature to increase system reli-
ability and is called FailSoft Mode.
Note: A device can signal a zone alarm to the system
during some communication failures.
2-6.2.1 ALARM MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of
operation:
The red ALARM LED will be illuminated and there
will be a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer
at the panel, and
The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active alarms. See Figure 2-3 for example.
Figure 2-3. Active Alarms Example
Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address
1000-8000 will be displayed depending on which
RX/TX module detects the zone alarm.
The outputs which have been previously programmed for
activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned
on (e.g., signal audible signaling devices, control relays
for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall).
2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem is set into alarm:
1. Press the display panels <ACKLDGE> button to ac-
knowledge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-char-
acter display will continue to cycle between any
remaining alarms which have not been acknowledged.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-8
Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function
Note: 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
n o i t c n u F n o i t p i r c s e D a l u m r o F l e v e L s s e c c A
e c i v e D p o o L e t a l o s I s s e r d d a y b U C R n a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 1 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O l a n g i S e l u d o M e t a l o s I s s e r d d a y b t i u c r i c t u p t u o e l u d o m l a n g i s a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 1 - 2 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O l a n g i S e s a e l e R e l u d o M e t a l o s I . s s e r d d a y b t u p t u o l a n g i s e l u d o m e s a e l e r a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 2 - 2 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O l a n g i S M C C e t a l o s I t u p t u o l a n g i s M C C A e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 3 - 2 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O y a l e R e l u d o M e t a l o s I s s e r d d a y b t u p t u o y a l e r e l u d o m O / I a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 1 - 3 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O y a l e R M C C e t a l o s I t u p t u o y a l e r M C C e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 2 - 3 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O e s a e l e R e l u d o M e t a l o s I s s e r d d a t u p t u o y b t u p t u o e s a e l e r t n e g a n a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 1 - 4 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O e s a e l e R t n e g A M C C e t a l o s I s s e r d d a t u p t u o M C C y b t u p t u o e s a e l e r t n e g a n a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 2 - 4 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O e i T y t i C e t a l o s I s s e r d d a t u p t u o y b e l u d o m e i t y t i c e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 5 - 1 M / 2 / 1
t u p t u O / t u p n I l a t i g i D e t a l o s I s s e r d d a y b t u p t u o / t u p n i l a t i g i d e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 6 - 1 M / 2 / 1
s t u p n I e t a l o s I l a b o l G s e l u d o m ; s e c i v e d p o o l t u p n i m e t s y s l l a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 1 - 7 - 1 M / 2
s t u p t u O e t a l o s I l a b o l G s e l u d o m t u p t u o m e t s y s l l a e t a l o s i - e D / e t a l o s I 2 - 7 - 1 M / 2
Note: 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
Table 2-3. List Menu Function
n o i t c n u F n o i t p i r c s e D a l u m r o F l e v e L s s e c c A
s e c i v e D p o o L d e t a l o s I t s i L d e t a l o s i e r a h c i h w s e c i v e D p o o L l l a t s i L 1 - 1 - 1 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s e l u d o M d e t a l o s I t s i L d e t a l o s i e r a h c i h w s e l u d o m l l a t s i L 1 - 2 - 1 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s t u p t u o M C C d e t a l o s I t s i L d e t a l o s i e r a h c i h w s t u p t u o M C C l l a t s i L 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 M / 2 / 1
) s t n e v E l l A ( r e f f u B y r o t s i H t n e v E t s i L r e f f u b m o r f s e i r t n e y r o t s i h t n e v e d e d r o c e r l l a s t s i L 1 - 2 - 2 M / 2 / 1
) s t n e v E f o e g n a R ( r e f f u B y r o t s i H t n e v E t s i L e t a d y b s e i r t n e y r o t s i h t n e v e f o e g n a r e l b a t c e l e s r e s u a s t s i L 2 - 2 - 2 M / 2 / 1
r o t c e t e D e l g n i S a t s i L l e v e l t a e h / e k o m s e m i t l a e r s r o t c e t e d d e t c e l e s a s y a l p s i D 1 - 3 - 2 M / 2 / 1
l e v e L r o t c e t e D t s i L . l e v e l t n e s e r p d n a s t n i o p t e s m r a l a d n a m r a l a - e r p s r o t c e t e d m e t s y s l l a s t s i L 2 - 3 - 2 M / 2 / 1
) s ( m r a l A e v i t c A t s i L . ) s ( m r a l a m e t s y s e v i t c a l l a t s i L 1 - 4 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s n o i t i d n o C y r o s i v r e p u S e v i t c A t s i L . s n o i t i d n o c y r o s i v r e p u s m e t s y s e v i t c a l l a t s i L 2 - 4 - 2 M / 2 / 1
n o i t i d n o C e l b u o r T e v i t c A t s i L s n o i t i d n o c e l b u o r t m e t s y s e v i t c a l l a t s i L 3 - 4 - 2 M / 2 / 1
m a r g o r P C O E t s i L s e n i l m a r g o r p C O E t s i L 1 - 5 - 2 M / 2 / 1
m a r g o r P C T R t s i L s e n i l m a r g o r p C T R t s i L 2 - 5 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s e s s e r d d A e c i v e D p o o L t s i L m e t s y s e h t o t n i d e r e t s i g e r s e c i v e d p o o l l l a t s i L 1 - 6 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s e s s e r d d A e l u d o M t s i L m e t s y s e h t o t n i d e r e t s i g e r s e l u d o m l l a t s i L 2 - 6 - 2 M / 2 / 1
s l e v e L e g a t l o V e n i L C P t s i L e c i v e d p o o l d e i f i c e p s h c a e t a s l e v e l e g a t l o v e n i l C P s t s i L 1 - 7 - 2 M / 2 / 1
l e v e l y l p p u s r e w o p c d V 9 e c i v e D p o o L t s i L l e v e l y l p p u s r e w o p t l o v 9 e c i v e d p o o l d e i f i c e p s s t s i L 2 - 7 - 2 M / 2 / 1
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-9
n o i t c n u F n o i t p i r c s e D a l u m r o F l e v e L s s e c c A
e m i T m e t s y S t e S e m i t m e t s y s t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 1 - 3 M / 2 / 1
e t a D m e t s y S t e S e t a d m e t s y s t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 1 - 3 M / 2 / 1
) I + V ( y r e t t a B f o y a l p s i D t e S . t n e r r u c d n a e g a t l o v g n i g r a h c y r e t t a b f o y a l p s i d t e s o t r e s u w o l l A 3 - 1 - 3 M / 2 / 1
r e t n i r P l a n r e t n I t e S n o i t c e n n o c r e t n i r p l a n r e t n i r o f t r o p e l b a n E 1 - 1 - 2 - 3 M / 2 / 1
r e t n i r P l a n r e t n I e l b a s i D n o i t c e n n o c r e t n i r p l a n r e t n i r o f t r o p e l b a s i D 2 - 1 - 2 - 3 M / 2 / 1
r e t n i r P l a n r e t x E t e S n o i t c e n n o c r e t n i r p l a n r e t x e r o f t r o p e l b a n E 1 - 2 - 2 - 3 M / 2 / 1
r e t n i r P l a n r e t x E e l b a s i D n o i t c e n n o c r e t n i r p l a n r e t x e r o f t r o p e l b a s i D 2 - 2 - 2 - 3 M / 2 / 1
s s e r d d A e c i v e D t e S . s s e r d d a e c i v e d e g n a h c o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 3 - 3 M / 2
y t i v i t i s n e S r o t c e t e D n o i t a z i n o I t e S s g n i t t e s m r a l a d n a m r a l a - e r p r o t c e t e d n o i t a z i n o I t s u j d a o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 2 - 3 - 3 M / 2
y t i v i t i s n e S r o t c e t e D c i r t c e l e o t o h P t e S s g n i t t e s m r a l a d n a m r a l a - e r p r o t c e t e d c i r t c e l e o t o h P t s u j d a o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 2 - 3 - 3 M / 2
y t i v i t i s n e S r o t c e t e D l a m r e h T t e S s g n i t t e s m r a l a d n a m r a l a - e r p r o t c e t e d l a m r e h T t s u j d a o t r e s u s w o l l A 3 - 2 - 3 - 3 M / 2
s e c i v e D r e t s i g e R n o i t a r u g i f n o c m e t s y s o t n i s e c i v e d p o o l r e t s i g e r o t r e s u s w o l l A 3 - 3 - 3 M / 2
s e c i v e D r e t s i g e R - e D n o i t a r u g i f n o c m e t s y s m o r f s e c i v e d p o o l r e t s i g e r - e d o t r e s u s w o l l A 4 - 3 - 3 M / 2
l o r t n o C k n i l B g n i k n i l b D E L r o t c e t e d e l b a s i d o t r e s u s w o l l A 5 - 3 - 3 M / 2
e d o M t h g i N / y a D t e S . n o i t c n u f y a d r o f r o t c e t e d e l b a n e o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 1 - 4 - 3 M / 2
s d o i r e P t h g i N / y a D t e S s d o i r e p t h g i N / y a D t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 1 - 4 - 3 M / 2
e d o M y a D e t a v i t c A e d o m y a D e t a v i t c a o t r e s u s w o l l A 3 - 1 - 4 - 3 M / 2
d r o w s s a P l e v e l t s 1 t e S d r o w s s a p l e v e l t s 1 t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 2 - 4 - 3 M / 2
d r o w s s a P l e v e l d n 2 t e S . d r o w s s a p l e v e l d n 2 t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 2 - 4 - 3 M / 2
m a r g o r P C T R e l b a n E n o i t c n u f o t e n i l m a r g o r p C T R e l b a n e o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 3 - 4 - 3 M / 2
m a r g o r P C T R e l b a s i D . g n i n o i t c n u f m o r f e n i l m a r g o r p C T R e l b a s i d o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 3 - 4 - 3 M / 2
e d o M n r a e L o t u A t e S n o i t c n u F n r a e L o t u A e h t e t a v i t c a o t r e s u s w o l l A 4 - 4 - 3 M / 2
n o i t a c i f i r e V m r a l A t e S
n a r o f d o i r e p e m i t d n a n o i t c n u f n o i t a c i f i r e v m r a l a e h t t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A
. s r o t c e t e d f o e g n a r r o r o t c e t e d l a u d i v i d n i
5 - 4 - 3 M / 2
n o i t c n u F S A P t e S s e c i v e d r o f e c n e u q e s m r a l a e v i t i s o p e h t t e s o t r e s u s w o l l A 6 - 4 - 3 M / 2
g o L t n e v E r a e l C s e i r t n e r e f f u b y r o t s i h t n e v e r a e l c o t r e s u s w o l l A 7 - 4 - 3 M / 2
e l b a n E e g d e l w o n k c A l a b o l G e r u t a e F e g d e l w o n k c A l a b o l G e h t s e l b a n E 1 - 8 - 3 M / 2
e l b a s i D e g d e l w o n k c A l a b o l G e r u t a e F e g d e l w o n k c A l a b o l G e h t s e l b a s i D 2 - 8 - 3 M / 2
Table 2-4. Set Menu Function
Note: 1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds.
2. 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-10
Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions
Note: WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated, the Alarm Simulation
Test (AST) processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device.
Before using the AST, ensure that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent
unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns).
1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
n o i t c n u F n o i t p i r c s e D a l u m r o F l e v e L s s e c c A
t s e T p m a L y t i l a n o i t c n u f s D E L m e t s y s t s e t o t r e s u e l b a n E 1 - 4 M / 2 / 1
t s e T e c i v e D p o o L
f o p u o r g r o r o t c e t e d a f o t s e t c i n o r t c e l e n a e t a v i t c a o t r e s u s w o l l A
s r o t c e t e d
1 - 2 - 4 M / 2 / 1
t s e T y r e t t a B y t i c a p a c y r e t t a b y f i r e v o t t s e t y r e t t a b a e t a v i t c a o t r e s u s w o l l A 3 - 4 M / 2 / 1
t s e T k l a W e l b a n E t s e t k l a w o t s e c i v e d f o e g n a r a y f i c e p s o t r e s u s w o l l A 1 - 4 - 4 M / 2
t s e T k l a W e l b a s i D e d o m t s e t k l a w e l b a s i d o t r e s u s w o l l A 2 - 4 - 4 M / 2
t s e T n o i t a l u m i S m r a l A
o t s t u p n i f o p i h s n o i t a l e r d e m m a r g o r p y f i r e v o t r e l l a t s n i s w o l l A
e v i t c a e r a s t u p t u o g n i y f i r e v d n a s t u p n i g n i t a v i t c a y b s t u p t u o
5 - 4 M / 2
The <ACKLDGE> button must be pressed once for
each alarm received at the panel.
2. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the
alarm indicating circuits (audible devices) can be si-
lenced by operating the SILENCE switch.
3. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged,
verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN.
The XXX represents the total of all active alarms. All
active alarms can be viewed on the display by press-
ing the <SCROLL> button.
Note: Only the first 64 alarms will be displayed. Subse-
quent alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed,
even when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear.
However, all alarmsregardless of the totalwill
be processed in the EOC. For a complete list of
active alarms, access the event buffer menu us-
ing the CCM keypad.
4. Any subsequent alarms will cause any silenced alarm
circuits to reactivate. Each additional alarm must be
acknowledged before the alarm indicating circuits can
be silenced.
5. When a non-latching device goes out of alarm, the dis-
play will indicate the device address and produce an
alarm off (AOF) message. For example:
1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE
Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address 1000-
8000 will be displayed, indicating that active
device(s) in Failsoft mode on the indicated SLC
have gone out of alarm.
6. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowl-
edged with the <ACKLDGE> button (non-latching).
For latching mode: To return the system to normal,
press the <RESET> button once. If powering a 4-wire
detector from the PEGAsys, the <RESET> button will
need to be pushed once to reset the detector and once
to reset the panel to a normal condition.
7. Once all alarms have been cleared in non-latching op-
eration, the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM
REMAINS. At this time, the system may be reset by
operating the <RESET> button.
8. When the system is properly reset, the display will
show the System Status Normal message, time and
date. The preceding will happen if no active troubles
or supervisories are present, in which case the Ac-
tive Troubles or Active Supervisories message will
be displayed.
2-6.3 Active Supervisory Mode
The system enters supervisory mode when it detects an
abnormal condition in the system that has been defined to
be a higher priority than a common trouble. This type of
trouble is usually assigned by the installer/designer to
monitor critical parts of the system.
2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY MODE INDICATION
The following indicates the system is in the supervisory
mode of operation.
The yellow SUPERVISORY LED will be flashing at a
one (1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing buzzer
at the CCM. This audible is distinctively different from
the alarm signal pattern at the CCM.
The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active supervisory events. See Figure 2-4 for
an example.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-11
Figure 2-4. Supervisory Example for
Supervisory Mode Indication
2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem enters the supervisory mode of operation:
1. To silence the supervisory audible signal, all current
supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the
<ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system
buzzer.
2. When all supervisory conditions have been acknowl-
edged, the 80-character display will read: XXX AC-
TIVE SUPERVISORIES REMAIN, wi th XXX
representing the total number of active supervisory
events. All current supervisory conditions can be
viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> but-
ton.
3. As each supervisory condition is cleared, the display
will read one (1) less active supervisory event until all
supervisories are clear. When all active supervisory
events have been cleared, the SUPERVISORY LED
will be extinguished, and the 80-character display will
show the Standby Message (e.g., "System Status Nor-
mal").
Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global ba-
sis. The panel, by default, will require that each
trouble and supervisory event be acknowledged
individually. However, if the installer wishes to en-
able this function, it can be done by accessing the
"set" menu option using the CCM keypad. Refer
to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping
through the menus to enable and disable the Glo-
bal Acknowledge function. With global acknowl-
edge, a total of thirty (30) troubles and supervisory
events can be acknowledged at one time.
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode
The system enters trouble mode when it detects an ab-
normal condition that may prevent proper operation (e.g.,
loss of communications with a smoke detector) or when a
pre-alarm condition occurs. Refer to Appendix G for a com-
plete list of trouble conditions.
2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates that the system is in its trouble mode
of operation.
The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a one
(1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer
at the CCP. This audible signal is distinctively different
from the alarm audible signal.
The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active troubles and pre-alarms. For example:
Figure 2-5. Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example
2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem is in the trouble mode of operation:
1. To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble
conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the
<ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system
buzzer.
2. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged,
the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE
TROUBLES REMAIN, with XXX representing the to-
tal number of active troubles. All current trouble condi-
tions can be viewed on the display by pressing the
<SCROLL> button.
Note: Only the first 300 troubles (supervisory or com-
mon) on a Single-Loop will be displayed. Subse-
quent troubles or supervisories will not be
displayed, even if any, or all 300 troubles clear.
However, all of the active troubles or supervisories
will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a compl ete l i sti ng of al l troubl es and
supervisories over the initial 300, access the event
buffer by using the CCM keypad.
For the multi-loop system, only the first 2100
troubles or supervisories will be displayed. Sub-
sequent troubles or supervisories over the first
2100 will not be displayed, even if any, or all 2100
troubles or supervisories clear. However, all
troubles or supervisoriesregardless of the total
will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a complete listing of all active troubles and
supervisories, access the event buffer by using
the CCM keypad.
3. As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will
read one (1) less active trouble until all troubles are
cleared. When all active troubles have been cleared,
the TROUBLE LED will be extinguished, and the 80-
character display will show the standby message (e.g.,
"System Status Normal").
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-12
Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global ba-
sis. The panel, by default, will require that each
trouble be acknowledged individually. However, if
the installer wishes to enable this function, it can
be done by accessing the "set" menu option using
the CCM keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more in-
formation on stepping through the menus to en-
able and disable the Global Acknowledge function.
With global acknowledge, a total of thirty (30)
troubles can be acknowledged at one time.
2-7 PRINTING OPERATION
In addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system infor-
mation can be viewed using the printer port of the CCM.
For detailed information pertaining to connecting an RS-
232 peripheral device, see Paragraph 7-18.
When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is
attached, the system will print out all status change infor-
mation and any system information lists that the user would
request from the system using the integral keypad.
2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique
programming languages that are easy to understand and
use. These two versatile programming languages, Event
Output Control (EOC) and Real-Time Control (RTC), can
accommodate most any fire alarm control logic applica-
tions. The system is programmed using a personal com-
puter connected to the system via an interface cable.
The two programs are constructed by the system engi-
neer/installer using the PEGAsys Configuration Software
(PCS) program which is Windows

based. The PCS pro-

gram allows the user to configure, verify, upload, down-
load, edit, retrieve, store and print the entire system
configuration program. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns
76-014 and 76-015) for further details.
2-8.1 EOC Programming
The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically com-
bines the systems input devices with the system's output
devices. The program consists of sequentially numbered
lines of equations containing input addresses, output ad-
dresses and logic operators. When an input becomes true
(active), the system processes the EOC program and ac-
tivates any associated outputs as programmed.
Example:
The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would
be: Input = Output
A basic equation with one or more inputs would be:
Input Operator Input = Output
The system normally processes the EOC from left to right.
However, in equations with parentheses, the contents of the
parentheses are executed first. Refer to the PCS manuals
(P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details.
2-8.1.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING
The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be
listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions.
To list the system's EOC programming:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the EOC program list by typing the formula
2-5-1. The system will then list all lines of the Event Out-
put Control program on the LCD and send a printout to
any attached printer.
2-8.2 RTC Programming
The RTC program permits outputs to be controlled by the
systems real-time clock. Outputs may be programmed to
occur on an hour, day, week and month time control basis.
Alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels of all or individual de-
tectors can be increased or decreased in sensitivity (within
UL limits) under RTC control. The RTC programming also
provides the ability to control RCU relays, output module re-
lays and smoke detector pre-alarm and alarm set points.
The program consists of sequentially numbered lines, each
containing control object, control content, time, date and day
of week. For further details, refer to the PCS manual.
2-8.2.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING
The RTC program can be listed using either the owner's or
installer's menu functions. To list the RTC programming:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the RTC program by typing the formula
2-5-2. The system will then list all lines of the Real-
Time Control program on the LCD and send a printout
to any attached printer.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-13
2-8.2.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE
NUMBERS
Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically en-
abled when entered into the system. Once a line number in
the RTC Program has been disabled using the procedure
below, the line will be ignored by the RTC Program until en-
abled. To enable a line number which has been previously
disabled, follow the procedure below; select "ENABLE" in step
2.
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
2. Select the set RTC program by typing the formula
3-4-3. Verify the display reads:
1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE
3. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the
display reads:
RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _
4. Type the three digit line number and press the return
key.
5. Continue with another RTC line or press backspace
key to cancel this function.
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs
The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/mod-
ules, which are discussed in the following paragraphs:
2-8.3.1 SYSTEM INPUTS
Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke
detectors, heat detectors, addressable contact monitors
(alarm, trouble, abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual re-
lease, supervisory and normal) and HSSD detectors report-
ing via PALM modules. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns
76-014 and 76-015) for further details.
2-8.3.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)
The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to
the RX/TX loop(s), are specified in the EOC program by their
four-digit addresses.
2-8.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS
The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop
number followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single
loop systems and (1000-8000) in multi-loop systems. The
specifier (1000-8000) will appear in cases when trouble con-
ditions are present on a particular RX/TX loop controller (i.e.,
a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 would be displayed as "RX/TX
PC Line Short Loop 1").
RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm ini-
tiates under one of the following conditions:
Failed communications between the CCM and
RX/TX module (Trouble Condition),
Failed RX/TX or CCM processor. (Trouble Condi-
tion), or
Failed input circuit of RCU device.
An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode)
can only activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is
used as a programmed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 =
8000, etc.).
2-8.3.4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS
Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM
signals and relays (programmable/non programmable);
output modules (signal outputs, relay outputs, agent re-
lease outputs, release signal outputs, city tie outputs) and
loop devices (addressable relay output module or signal/
sounder module).
2-8.3.5 SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES
The output modules which the system supports are Signal
Outputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent and signal)
outputs and the City Tie output.
2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules
The output modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Out-
put, Agent Release Output, City Tie output and the power
supply module. Output modules refer to any module which
installs into the optional output motherboard or multi-loop
motherboard with the exception of the power supply
module(s). The output modules communicate with the CCM
over the RS-485 communications bus.
Each module has outputs which can be individually ad-
dressed. The address consists of two (2) alphabetic and
two (2) numeric characters which define the module type,
address and output circuit number. The output module ad-
dress scheme is shown below.
SG 1 : 3
Module Address (1-8),
See note 2.
I/O Circuit Number (1-4),
See note 1.
Module Type,
See note 3.
SG Signal/Audible Output
RY Relay Output
CT City Tie Output
AR Agent Release Output
RS Release Signal Output
PS Power Supply Monitor Module
Figure 2-6. Output Module Address Scheme
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-14
Note:
1. The output modules vary in number of outputs. Refer
to section one component description for thorough
descriptions of options.
2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of sixteen
(16) output modules for single-loop and twenty-three
(23) output modules for multi-loop, eight (8) maximum
of any one output module type.
3. Power supply monitors only need an address; they
have no need for an output number.
The output module address is set using the three (3) dip
switches contained on each PCB assembly. Each module
uses different numbered switches for module address as-
signment. The address is set during the installation proce-
dure by placing the switches into the correct position. Refer
to the appropriate figure in Appendix I for the correct mod-
ule and the addressing matrix. For a functional description
of each module, refer to Chapter 3.
The switches would be set for each type of module in or-
der. For example, signal modules would be addressed 1-8
if there were eight (8) in the system; relay modules would
be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system and
the same holds true for the remaining modules. The only
exception being the City Tie modulethere can only be
one City Tie module in a system at any time.
2-8.5 Registering Output Module Assignments
Output modules are registered into the system configura-
tion through the use of the PCS program. The installer
would configure all modules in the PCS program file and
then upload this file to the system which would then inter-
nally verify the existence of the specified modules. For fur-
ther details on output module registration, refer to the PCS
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are au-
tomatically registered by the CCM upon system power-up.
2-8.5.1 LISTING OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENT
All output modules which are programmed into the sys-
tem may be listed with the use of either the owner's or
installer's menu functions.
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the list of module address assignments by typ-
ing the formula 2-6-2. The system will then list all of
the registered output module addresses on the LCD
and send a printout to any attached printer.
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs
RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from
the RX/TX PC (Power/Communications) Line. These de-
vices include SmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat
detectors, addressable contact input monitors, address-
able output modules (AOs or ASMs) and PALM Orion XT
monitor modules.
Each device has a three-digit numeric address. This ad-
dress is stored in the nonvolatile EEPROM memory of the
device. The device is identified by the CCM by these three
digits, and by a fourth digit which represents the RX/TX
number.
There are two ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices.
1. The RCUs (except PALMs) can be addressed using
the Hand Held Programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). This
optional unit provides a convenient means of address-
ing RCUs without using the CCM. (See Paragraph
3-3.2.1 for instructions on addressing PALMs.)
2. The user may address the devices individually on the
system by performing the procedure listed below.
To address RCUs using the SET RCU Address menu
function, each unaddressed RCU must be connected to
the RX/TX PC line one at a time. Perform the following
steps for each RCU:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the set RCU address function by typing the for-
mula 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads:
PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
Note: All new addressable devices have an address of
zero (000).
3. Enter the present RCU address and press the
<RETURN> button. The system will display the fol-
lowing:
TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
4. Enter the desired address for the RCU and press
<RETURN>. The system will now change the RCU
address if it is different from the previous address.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered and uploaded into the system by
use of the PCS program .
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-15
2-8.7 Registering RCUs
Registration is where the device address is joined with the
device information in the system's memory. Device infor-
mation is comprised of: device type, device messages and
device settings.
There are four ways to register the RCU (loop) devices
into the system:
1. The user may register the devices individually in the
system.
2. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs at once
using the RCU (loop devices) registration function.
3. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs using
the AutoLearn function, which sets all devices at de-
fault values, and, in turn, any system alarm input acti-
vates all system outputs. If pre-addressed devices are
used, multiple devices can be attached and registered
into the system at one time using either the AutoLearn
or RCU Registration function.
4. The RCUs can also be registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify
each RCU to be connected to the system, and then
upload the system configuration file to the system. The
system would then supervise each device specified.
Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015)
for further details on RCU registration.
1032
001-255 = Device Address (registered)
000 = Device Address (unaddressed/
unregistered)
RXTX loop number
1 for single-loop systems,
1-8 for multi-loop systems
Figure 2-7. RCU Registration Screen
Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX
loop 1.
Connecting an unregistered RCU address to the RX/TX
will result in a "not registered" trouble (TBL NR), indicating
that the control panel has communicated with the device
and identified the device as being unregistered.
To register RCU devices using the register RCU function,
attach all pre-addressed loop devices to the PC line of the
RX/TX module. Power-up the system (if it is not already
running). As the loop devices power up, they will begin to
communicate with the RX/TX module. The CCM will rec-
ognize the loop devices as not registered, and will issue a
trouble message for each non-registered (TBL NR) de-
vice attached. When the register RCU function is enabled,
the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop de-
vice addresses to register as valid system devices. At the
conclusion of the register function, the CCM will display
the total amount of devices registered.
The AutoLearn function works much the same as the reg-
istration function, as it automatically enters the devices
which it can identify into the system's configuration memory.
During both the AutoLearn and RCU Registration proce-
dures, the CCM will automatically register the loop devices
into memory and also set each device to default settings
(e.g., sensitivity levels and input reporting) for the particu-
lar device. The CCM will also set the default operation of
the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 and MP04). Any
system alarm received after this time will cause all the CCM
outputs (MP01-MP04) to activate.
Optionally, if the output motherboard and output modules
have been installed, the PCS program will need to be used
to configure the system for use with the output modules.
Procedures for registering output modules are provided in
the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015, see Para-
graph 2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules).
2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION
SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered in
the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the
previous section. However, detection device application, the
alarm and pre-alarm levels, and latching or non-latching op-
tions will have to be selected. There are three specific appli-
cations for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High
Air Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detector's pre-alarm
and alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the
user desires the set points to be different from the default
values for each detector type.
The detectors will use the default values, unless otherwise
programmed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer
to Chapter 5, Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detec-
tor Sensitivities.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owner's location message can
only be entered through the PCS program, and then uploaded
into system memory.
2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
REGISTRATION
The addressable contact monitors are registered in the
system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the
previous section. The system will, by default, set the re-
sponse of the device activation to alarm. During system
configuration (using the PCS program), the following
choices are allowed: Alarm, Trouble, Abort, Supervisory,
Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Normal. See
below for the specific contact monitor selections.
Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system
through the PCS program. The installer would specify each
contact monitor RCU to be connected to the system and
then upload the system configuration file to the system.
The system would then supervise each device specified.
Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for
further details on RCU registration.
PEGAsys
July 2003 76-100016-001 2-16
1: AlarmActive input initiates an alarm at the central
control panel and is latched in the EOC until the sys-
tem is reset after alarm has cleared.
2: TroubleActive input initiates a trouble at the central
control panel, but does not latch EOC programming
and will self restore upon deactivation.
3: AbortActive input initiates an abort condition at the
central control panel. This will delay agent release if
countdown has begun. It does not latch EOC program
and will self-restore upon deactivation. There are four
(4) styles of abort available for the device.
4: WaterflowActive input initiates a waterflow alarm con-
dition at the central control panel and is latched in EOC
program until reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from
being silenced.
5: Manual AlarmActive input initiates a manual alarm
condition at the central control panel, latches in EOC
program until reset.
6: Manual ReleaseActive input initiates a manual re-
lease condition at the central control panel, causes
instant release of programmed output, latches in EOC
program until reset
7: NormalActive input initiates a momentary display but
does not latch in EOC program, self-restores.
8: SupervisoryActive input initiates a supervisory event
at the central control panel, but does not latch the EOC,
and will self-restore upon deactivation.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered by use of the PCS program and
uploaded into system memory.
2-8.7.3 REMOTE CONTROL MODULE
REGISTRATION
The addressable output device (AO or ASM) is registered
in the same fashion as the previous RCUs.
Control modules can also be registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify each
output RCU to be connected to the system, upload the
system configuration file to the system and then the sys-
tem would supervise each device specified. Refer to the
PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further de-
tails on RCU registration.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered by use of the PCS program and
uploaded into system memory.
2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs
All RCUs registered in the system can be listed using ei-
ther the owner's or installer's menu function. To list all reg-
istered RCUs:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the List RCU address function by typing the for-
mula 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached
printers list all registered RCU addresses.
2-8.7.5 DE-REGISTERING RCUs
The system provides the capability to remove a single de-
vice or group of devices from the system configuration.
This function removes the device address from the sys-
tem memory but leaves the address in the device intact.
Performing this operation will cause the system to gener-
ate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for any devices which
remain connected to the RX/TX PC line. Removal or dis-
connection of the device(s) from the PC line will clear the
trouble condition(s) in the system.
This function would be used during a system retrofit where
some devices are to be removed from the system tempo-
rarily during a building renovation and then reattached af-
ter renovations are complete. This feature is very efficient
because the device maintains its address information which
speeds device reregistering after the renovations.
To perform the device de-registering operation:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing
the formula 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
3. Enter the desired RCU address(es) and press return.
The display will show the following to verify the device
de-registration:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED
4. Verify that the display changes to the device menu af-
ter five seconds. The backspace key can be pressed
to return to the main menu.
5. To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure
which is outlined Paragraph 2-8.7, Registering RCUs.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-1
CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides a functional description of the de-
vices/modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration.
Each functional description covers one of the blocks shown
in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
The PEGAsys system is divided into ten functional blocks
as follows:
Central Control Module
Display Module
Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System
Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System
Display
Module
Power
Supply No. 1
Central
Control
Module
Receiver/
Transmitter
Module
(RX/TX)
Remote
Display
Module(s)
ATM
Driver
Module(s)
Network
Interface
Card
AC
Input
Battery
Backup
24 Vdc
RS 485
24
Vdc
RS 485
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
SLC to
RCUs
(Field Devices)
RX/TX - CCM
Communications
RS 485
RS 485
5 Vdc RS 485
RS 485
To Networked Control Unit(s)
RS 485
Channel 1
Channel 2
Output
Motherboard 1 RS 485
24 Vdc
Output Module(s)
RS 485 24 Vdc
Power
Supply No. 2
AC
Input
Battery
Backup
Output
Motherboard 2 RS 485
24 Vdc
Output Module(s)
RS 485 24 Vdc
RS 485
Display
Module
Power
Supply No. 1
Central
Control
Module
Network
Interface
Card
AC
Input
Battery
Backup
24 Vdc
RS 485
24
Vdc
RS 485
24 Vdc
SLC 1 to RCUs
RX/TX - CCM
Communications
5 Vdc RS 485
RS 485
To Networked Control Unit(s)
RS 485
Channel 1
Channel 2
Multi-Loop
Motherboard
Output Module(s)
Power
Supply No. 2
AC
Input
Battery
Backup
Output
Motherboard
RS 485
24 Vdc
Output Module(s)
RS 485 24 Vdc
RS 485
RX/TX Module 1
RX/TX 1 - CCM
Communications
24 Vdc
RX/TX Module N
RX/TX N - CCM
Communications
24 Vdc
SLC N to RCUs
RS-485
24 Vdc
RS 485
Remote
Display
Module(s)
ATM
Driver
Module(s)
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
RS 485
RS 485
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-2
RX/TX Module
Output Modules
RCUs (Field Devices)
Power Supply Module
Motherboard
Remote Display/Control Modules (Optional)
ATM Driver Modules (Optional)
Network Interface Card (Optional)
As described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system is available
in two configurations: single-loop and multi-loop. The above
devices/modules for both configurations are shown in the
Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph
3-3.
3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
The functional descriptions will describe each device or
module depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
3-3.1 Central Control Module
The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two ver-
sions: single-loop (P/N 76-100008-501, networkable, Ver-
sion 7X.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-701, networkable,
ORION XT compatible, Version 8X.X firmware) and multi-
loop (P/N 76-100008-600, networkable, Version 7X.X firm-
ware and P/N 76-100008-800, networkable, ORION XT
compatible, Version 8X.X firmware). Figure 3-3 contains
the main central processing unit, real-time clock, watch
dog timer and RS-232 serial communication input/output
ports. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of
all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX mod-
ules, processes the data based on pre-programmed in-
structions and transmits output commands to the output
modules, field devices and display module(s).
The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for program-
ming and monitoring of the PEGAsys system. These ports
accept six-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS pro-
gram is used to interface to the system for programming
purposes. A multi-level password scheme protects the sys-
tem from unauthorized access.
The real-time clock provides the CCM with the ability to
display the current time and date on the system LCD and
control the system with time-based programming.
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of
the system. For example, microprocessor failure, memory
failure, RS-232 port troubles, etcetera.
Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details
0V
PORT
DISP PRINT
PORT PORT
JK1
JK2
0V 24V 5V
PLG1
P.C.
DISPLAY
5V
JK3
1
BT1
JP2
PLG2
SOUNDER 2
JP4
SW1
JP3
TB4 TB5
SOUNDER 1
- R
E
P
1
+
A
- R
E
P
2
B
+ +
A
-
JP1
VOLT FREE RELAYS
C
TB1 TB2
+
B
- NO NO
1
NC C
2
NC
TB3
NC
V/F RELAY
FAULT
NO C
F
L
T
S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
L
T
E
A
R
T
H
2
4
V
0
V
TB6
JK4
R
X
/T
X
P
O
R
T
JK5
P
O
R
T
I
/O
To External
Printer
CCM Reset
Button
To Remote P.C. For
Programing
24 Vdc From
Power Supply
To RX/TX
Loop Controller
To Output Modules and
Power Supplies
See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2
See Note 1
Note 1: The trouble relay
contacts are shown in the
unpowered state.
Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are
used to configure MP01 to be
signaling (default) or releasing
outputs. See Appendix I for
further details.
SKT1
Display Reset
Switch
P
L
G
2
J
K
1
J
K
2
P
L
G
3
S
W
1
P
L
G
2
J
K
3
P
L
G
1
PRINT PORT
DS1
0
V
2
4
V
D
C
E
A
R
T
H
F
A
U
L
T
S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
A
U
L
T
T
B
6
BUZZER
Processor
Port
Display
Port
PC Port
Display Trouble
LED
24 Vdc from
Power Supply
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-3
Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details
1
2
3
4
4
2
3
1
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit
STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit
74-200012-001
Mounted to RX/TX
LOOP ISOLATOR
4321
2
4
V
2
4
V
R
E
T
R
E
T
RX/TX
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit
to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.
CPU Reset
PC Line Normal
CPU Reset
PC Line Reset
Loop Isolator
for Style 7
(74-200012-001)
See Note
See Note
Loop
Isolator
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
between loop isolators
74-200012-001
Mounted to RX/TX
LOOP ISOLATOR
4321
2
4
V
2
4
V
R
E
T
R
E
T
RX/TX
Loop
Isolator
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
See Note
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Note: Refer to jumper table in Appendix I
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator
STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit
R
X
/
T
X
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
1
24 Vdc from
Power Supply
RS-232 Port for
Communication
with CCM
24 Vdc
(Red)
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1
and MP2) can be used for signaling devices (horns,
strobes, bells) and allow up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power.
One of the two outputs is programmed for releasing sole-
noid type suppression equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type
systems).
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and
MP4) are on the CCM for controlling building functions
during alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are acti-
vated through the EOC programming which allows sys-
tem inputs to be related to system outputs. Each of these
relays have Form C contacts, rated at 1 A, 30 Vdc.
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied, which is
normally powered and will transfer on any system trouble,
pre-alarm or complete power-off condition. Form C con-
tact rating is 1 A @ 30 Vdc. See Appendix I for further
installation details.
An event history buffer is provided in the CCM which will
store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-
loop of system event information and allow the operator to
retrieve this information for review of system operation.
The PCS program provides the ability to download, store
and print all or a portion of the Event History Buffer.
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software inter-
face between the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed
RX/TX module continually monitors all addressable de-
vices for alarm and trouble conditions. Each device is ca-
pable of initiating and sending alarm and trouble messages
to the RX/TX module to which it is connected.
The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and
establishes communications with the loop devices. The
RX/TX receives status changes from the loop devices and
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-4
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST
BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.
TWO (2) SEALED
LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES
NOTE: SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W
RESISTOR ACROSS W5 WHEN
USING 220 VAC POWER.
Figure 3-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details
reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX (see Fig-
ure 3-4) is capable of communicating with up to 255 intel-
ligent devices and complies with the Signaling Line Circuit
(SLC) requirements of NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 and 7. Style 4
initiation circuit wiring will permit T tapping or branch cir-
cuitry. Style 7 requires the use of isolator devices.
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The power supply/charger assembly (see Figure 3-5)
(P/N 76-100009-010), is comprised of a PCB mounted on
an AC/DC switching power module. The switching power
supply provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power from the 120/
240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a micropro-
cessor-based unit which provides the system with:
Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision
(low voltage battery cutoff is at 19 Vdc)
AC power supervision
24 Vdc supervision
Battery load test
24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)
Trouble relay that transfers upon any power sup-
ply trouble or power off condition (relay shown in
the non-powered state)
Two auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs (programmable for
switched or non-switched configurations)
The auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs are rated at 1.5 Amp each
and can be used to power four-wire type detection devices
such as smoke, flame and gas detectors.
Note: Outputs must be sized properly to stay within out-
put current limits.
The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and
communicates with the CCM over the RS-485 communi-
cations bus.
The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal con-
nections for an auxiliary power module. This module comes
with two different wiring harnesses, as follows:
P/N 76-100009-002. Supplied with a 36-inch har-
ness that is meant to connect a main power sup-
ply/charger assembly to the auxiliary power mod-
ule in the main cabinet.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-5
P/N 76-100009-003. Supplied with an 8-inch har-
ness to mount a main power supply/charger as-
sembly to an auxiliary power module in a expan-
sion enclosure.
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main
power supply/charger assembly will provide an additional
4 Amps of current and make the total available current 8
Amps for this assembly. The system can support up to
eight (8) main power supply/charger assemblies with the
capability of adding an auxiliary power module to each one
to provide a maximum available current of 64 Amps. Each
additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-
010) will need to have a separate address to operate in
the system. The auxiliary power module shares the same
address as the main power supply/charger assembly that
it is connected to. See Appendix I for further installation
details.
3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard
The multi-loop motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001,
is an assembly which can accept any combination of nine
(9) modules consisting of up to eight (8) RX/TX modules
and provide connections for up to seven (7) output mod-
ule circuit board assemblies (see Figure 3-6). The ML
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the
main system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 Vdc
power, CCM-RX/TX communications and output bus com-
munications to the output modules. The output bus com-
munications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable)
style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects the
ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications.
The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a
two-conductor wiring harness connected to a terminal block
(TB11) and is distributed through terminal blocks
(TB1-TB8) for connection to RX/TXs. The 24 Vdc, pro-
vided by the system power supply via two-conductor wir-
ing connected to terminal block TB-9, is distributed through
receptacles for powering output modules.
The RX/TX modules communicate to the CCM via the multi-
plexer, located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each
of the installed RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on
the motherboard. Table 3-1 lists each RX/TX communication
connection located on the motherboard and the loop number
and addresses assigned to the connected module. See Ap-
pendix I for installation details.
Table 3-1. Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors
R O T C E N N O C P O O L S S E R D D A
1 P J 1 5 5 2 1 - 1 0 0 1
2 P J 2 5 5 2 2 - 1 0 0 2
3 P J 3 5 5 2 3 - 1 0 0 3
4 P J 4 5 5 2 4 - 1 0 0 4
5 P J 5 5 5 2 5 - 1 0 0 5
6 P J 6 5 5 2 6 - 1 0 0 6
7 P J 7 5 5 2 7 - 1 0 0 7
8 P J 8 5 5 2 8 - 1 0 0 8
3-3.5 Signal Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Signal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-7, thus
providing thirty-two (32) possible signal circuits. Each Sig-
nal Output module is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc
outputs, which can operate as Class B, Style Y or Class
A, Style Z indicating circuits. The module will allow for
four (4) Class B or two (2) Class A or a mix of two (2) Class
B and one (1) Class A. Each circuit is supervised for open,
short and ground fault. Individual outputs can be isolated
via the system operator menu.
W1
J1 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J2
TB9
+24V
RET
TB10
485A
SIG GND
COM ALM
COM TBL
485B
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8
TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1
TB11
+24V
RET
JP10
RS-232
JP9
RS-485
Note: If the motherboard is the last device on the RS-485 bus, the W1 jumper remains in place.
If the motherboard is not the last device on the RS-485 bus, then it must be removed.
Figure 3-6. Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-6
Figure 3-7. Signal Output Module, Details
12
+
9
-
10
-
11
+
8
+
7
+
6
-
5
-
NotUsed
Auxiliary Power
Sounder Circuits 1-4
Reset Switch
Trouble LED
TB1
{
Module Address
Assignment
{
See Note 2
12
+
9
-
10
-
11
+
8
+
7
+
6
-
5
-
12
+
9
-
10
-
11
+
8
+
7
+
6
-
5
-
12
+
9
-
10
-
11
+
8
+
7
+
6
-
5
-
10K EOR
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 3
10K EOR 10K EOR
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 4
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 4
2 CLASS A, STYLE "Z
1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" AND
2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"
2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" AND
1 CLASS A STYLE "Z
4 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"
Note 1: See Appendix I for Jumper
Configuration (W1-W8).
2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when
Auxiliary Power Input is used to
remove module from motherboard
power bus.
3: Only 8 of this Type Module can
be used on the system. Refer
to Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1,
for other limitations.
10K EOR
10K EOR
10K EOR
10K EOR 10K EOR
10K EOR
10K EOR 10K EOR
10K EOR
S
I
G
N
A
L
A
U
D
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
1
The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated
for 24 Vdc signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per
circuit. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush cur-
rents has been made to help avoid any potential problems
with the increased power requirements in support of the
wide range of the ADA/UL 1971 signaling appliances in
the marketplace. See Appendix I for installation details.
Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from
either of two sources:
Primary supply up to its capacity, or
Auxiliary power supply input
Provision for hardwire input of auxiliary power has been
made through the use of hardwire connections between
the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 and 2 of the
terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits are
listed for use in power limited applications.
Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS
program for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-
Time) or Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation
between each signal output and its input source is defined
by the panel EOC logic program. In Walk Test mode, the
signal output circuit(s) sounds the test signal (if pro-
grammed properly). The walk test signal is a 1.0 second
pulse, sounded once as each device is activated.
3-3.6 Relay Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards for up to thirty-two
(32) relays . Each Auxiliary Relay Output card (shown in
Figure 3-8) is equipped with four (4) Form C, dry contact
relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay out-
put is accomplished through the system operator menu.
The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 Vdc and
1.0 Amp @ 120 Vac. See Appendix I for further installation
details.
Each relay output can be individually programmed via the
PCS program for operation. Relation between each relay
output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-7
logic program. In Walk Test mode, the relay output circuit(s)
will not operate when the input device(s) under test is ac-
tivated.
Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
R
E
L
A
Y
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
4
-
0
0
1
Figure 3-8. Relay Output Module, Details
3-3.7 Agent Release Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight
(8) agent release output modules, which provide up to eight
(8) possible release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal out-
puts on these modules. (See Figure 3-9.)
Module Address
Assignment
Reset Switch
Trouble LED
12
TB1
1
Auxiliary Power
Release Circuits
Signal Circuits
}
See Note 2
Note 1: A maximum of 8 of this type module can be used in the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
Figure 3-9. Agent Release Output Module, Details
Each Agent Release Output Module is equipped with a
24 V, supervised output which is programmable for sole-
noid-type discharge controls. The installer must select dis-
charge control type required during hardware and software
configuration programming. The circuit is supervised for
open or ground fault conditions. The ability for individual
release output isolate is provided through the system menu.
Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs
for three (3) Class B, Style Y 24 Vdc polarity reversing
type indicating circuits. Each signal circuit is supervised
for open, short and ground fault conditions. The ability for
individual output isolation is provided through the system
menus. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush cur-
rents has been made.
The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 Vdc control
devices. Each release output can supervise and activate
up to two (2) solenoid control heads.
Table 3-2 details all devices approved for operation with
the agent release module.
Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices
r e r u t c a f u n a M s d i o n e l o S
l a w n e F - e d d i K
d n a 0 0 5 6 8 4
1 0 0 0 5 6 8 4
l a w n e F - e d d i K 1 8 1 0 9 8
l a w n e F - e d d i K 4 9 4 7 9 8
l a w n e F - e d d i K 5 7 1 9 9 8
l a w n e F - e d d i K 0 3 6 5 9 8
l a w n e F - e d d i K 1 0 0 - 0 0 0 0 0 1 - 1 8
s r e r u t c a f u n a M s u o i r a V
G d n a E , D , B , A s p u o r G M F
s d i o n e l o S r e l k n i r p S
Power for standby and alarm operation of release and sig-
naling outputs shall derive from one of two sources:
Primary supply up to its capacity, or
Auxiliary power supply input.
Input of auxiliary power is hard-wired through terminals 1 and
2 on the module's terminal block. Output circuits are Listed
for use in Power Limited applications. All signaling power is
fully regulated.
3-3.8 City Tie Module
The City Tie Module (Figure 3-10) provides connection and
operation for Local Energy or Shunt-type Master Boxes and
Reverse Polarity styles of output. The output type is selected
by choosing which terminals terminate the field wiring. The
module has an amber LED to signify disconnect status. The
ability for individual output isolate is provided through the sys-
tem menus.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-8
Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system.
C
I
T
Y
T
I
E
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
2
-
0
0
1
Figure 3-10. City Tie Module, Details
Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip cir-
cuit wiring and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current
limited at 550 mA, 24 Vdc. Monitored for open, short and
ground fault.
Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0
Amp, 24 Vdc resistive.
Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for
trip circuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 Vdc.
Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power
Limited applications. See Appendix I for further installa-
tion details.
The City Tie Module will operate during the PEGAsys
"FailSoft mode. Any system alarm will cause the output to
transfer.
In Walk Test mode, the city notification outputs shall be
disabled. In addition, the output has provisions for manual
disable or isolate through the system menu. The initiation
of a walk test will create a system trouble, causing the city
tie output to transfer to the trouble state.
3-3.9 Remote Display Control Modules
The remote display control modules permit system events
to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accom-
plished, from more than one location in a facility.
Refer to Appendix L for a complete discussion of the
PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module and the Remote
Display Module. (See Figure 3-11.)
SYSTEM
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
3
8
AC POWER
ALARM
PRE-ALARM
6
1
7
2
SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM TROUBLE
System Status Display
SILENCE
9
4
0
5
SILENCE
SCROLL
R
Figure 3-11. RDCM Keypad
3-3.10 ATM Series Driver Modules
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphi-
cal annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to
be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit.
Refer to the ATM Series Installation and Operation Manual,
Part Number 06-236179-002, for a complete description
of the ATM Series Driver Modules.
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Lamp Test
Com
Ack
Reset
Silence
Drill
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
LK19
LK21
LK18
LK20
LK23 LK22
LK25 LK24
LK27 LK26
LK29 LK28
LK31 LK30
LK32
LK17
LK15 LK16
LK13 LK14
LK11 LK12
LK10
LK8
LK6
LK4
LK2
LK9
LK7
LK5
LK3
LK1
Trouble
Sup.
Sil. Out
Pre Alm
Alarm
Pwr On
A
B
+24 V
Com
PS Flt
W1
Out B
Out A
In B
In A
S2 S1
ATM-L/R
Earth Gnd
Figure 3-12. ATM Module
3-3.11 Network Interface Card
The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys
Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-to-
peer network for annunciation, event output control, and
operator intervention.
Refer to Appendix J for a complete discussion of the
PEGAsys Network Interface Card and system networking
capabilities.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
D
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
TB3
B2IA2
TB4
B2NA2
TB2
B1NA1
TB1
B1IA1
U11
C26
U16
1
U17
1
RV2
RV1
RV3
R26
K1
U18
1
U20
1
R
2
1
U21
1
R41
Q2
R40
Q3
C
1
0
R
4
3
R
4
2
R18 U6
1
U14
1
C8
R7
Q4
C9
U19 1
U15
1
Q1
C7
R1
R44
R17
R
V
1
1
R
2
4
R
V
1
2
E
8
R
V
1
0 RV8 RV6
E
4
E
7
R
2
5
R
5
R
6
R20
R22
RV5
RV4
E
3
E
2
E
5
E
6
R
4
R
3
R36
RV9
RV7
K2
K4
R
2
3
CR2
K3
CR1
U5
1
C
1
8
R
1
3
R
2
U4
1
U8
1
R29
R38
C24
R19
C17
+
R27
U9
1
R32
R12
U10
1
R28
C22
C16
C15
R31
C25 C
1
R
1
5
R
3
3
R34
C14
R
1
4
U2
1
C
2
3
U7
1
C20
+
C
2
E
1
C11
C5
C3 +
C4
+
R45
U13
1
R46
C27
U12
1
C12
C
R
3
Y1
TP2
+5
TP6
I2
TP4
N1
TP5
N2
TP3
I1
U3
1
C13
R10
TP1
GND
J1 DS2
N1
DS4
N2
DS3
I2
DS1
I1
Figure 3-13. Network Interface Card
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-9
3-3.12 Field Devices
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices pro-
vides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat
detection as well as the necessary monitoring and control
functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. Each
of the SmartOne devices features an intrinsic micropro-
cessor with 4K of nonvolatile memory. Each device con-
stantly monitors its surrounding environment and makes
decisions in response to that information. The devices then
report status as required to the control panel. Each loop
device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC
(power/communications) line.
This Distributed Intelligence architecture allows each loop
device to make decisions within the monitored area. This
unique utilization of processing power makes possible a
system of loop devices with greater capacity and flexibility
than any typical addressable device system with central-
ized processing.
Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks
in various patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates
and associated status levels are as follows:
Blink Rate Operation Status
9 Second Rate Normal mode
2 Second Rate Alarm (activated)
Off (not blinking) Trouble condition
The following three paragraphs describe each type of avail-
able detector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Typical Detector
3-3.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true dis-
tributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based
smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052
is a dual chamber, analog, ionization type detector, which
senses both visible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing
chamber permits 360of smoke entry and response. Each
detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field
programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm and
alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algo-
rithm are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low
profile look, and are available using the following:
Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector:
P/N 70-402001-100
3-3.14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true
distributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-
based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model
PSD-7152 is an analog, photoelectric type detector, which
responds to a broad range of smoldering and flaming type
fires. A unique sensing chamber permits 360of smoke
entry and response. Each detector is electronically addres-
sable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, de-
vice address and pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points
are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low
profile look, and are available using the following:
Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detec-
tor: P/N 71-402001-100
3-3.15 SmartOne Heat Detector
The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed in-
telligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat de-
tection to the PEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is an
analog fixed temperature, thermistor-type detector, which
does not respond to rate of rise conditions until its pro-
grammed set point is met. Unique algorithms are used to
compensate for heat rise without problems associated with
false alarms due to elevated rates of rise in ambient tem-
perature.
A unique sensing chamber permits 360of heat entry and
response. Each detector is electronically addressable and
can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address,
pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set point are stored in each
detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile
look, and are available using the following:
Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector:
P/N 70-404001-100
3-3.16 Addressable Contact Input Device
The PEGAsys Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) al-
lows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire
alarm devices, such as water flow and tamper switches,
to the PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used
to interface to the Manual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort
Stations. The addressable contact monitor device is pro-
grammable to report the following events: Alarm (default),
Trouble, Manual Alarm, Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release,
Abort, Supervisory and Normal (Silent input). Its default
setting is Alarm when programmed using the AutoLearn
function. (See Figure 3-15.)
The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED,
which allows the device to indicate its current operating
status. In normal standby mode, the LED will flash every
nine (9) seconds; in trouble condition, the LED will be ex-
tinguished; and when activated, the LED will flash every
two (2) seconds.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-10
Addressable Contact Input Device (NO):
P/N 70-407008-001.
Addressable Contact Input Device (NC):
P/N 70-407008-002.
M
O
D
E
L
A
I,
N
/O
IN
S
T
R
U
C
T
IO
N
S
S
E
E
IN
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
IO
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-4
0
7
0
0
8
-0
0
1
S
m
a
rtO
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
IC
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
ID
D
E
-F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
IN
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
IN
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0
F
7654321
0
6
-2
3
5
5
7
8
-0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
8
A
S W
B
S W
( + )
L E D
( - )
L E D
Remote LED
(Optional)
PC Line
In
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
PC Line
Out
EOL
(10K Resistor) W
Typical N.O. Initiating
Devices
Typical N.C. Supervisory
Devices
A
LL
T
E
R
M
IN
A
LS
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
LIM
IT
E
D
7654321
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
8
A
S W
B
S W
( + )
L E D
( - )
L E D
EOL
(10K Resistor) W
Figure 3-15. Addressable Contact Input Device
3-3.17 Addressable Relay Output Device
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001)
provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C, dry contact
interface for remote control applications. The device con-
nects directly to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an
SPDT relay for control of auxiliary equipment. The device
can be activated through the system EOC or RTC pro-
gramming. Its default operation programming is done dur-
ing the AutoLearn function.
The unit includes an intrinsic status LED, which allows the
device to indicate its current operating status. In normal
standby mode, the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds;
in trouble condition, the LED will be extinguished; and in
activated condition, the LED will flash every two (2) sec-
onds. ( See Figure 3-16.)
Addressable Relay Output Device:
P/N 70-408004-001
M
O
D
E
L
A
O
IN
S
T
R
U
C
T
IO
N
S
S
E
E
IN
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
IO
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
4
-
0
0
1
S
m
a
r
t
O
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
IC
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
ID
D
E
-
F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
IN
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
IN
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0

F
7654321
0
6
-
2
3
5
5
7
7
-
0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
N / C C O M N / O
PC Line
In
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
PC Line
Out
N/O
COM
N/C
Field
Connections
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
5
-7
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
1
-4
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
7
6
5
Form C contact rated at:
0.6 A @ 120 Vac
2.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive)
1.0 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive)
Figure 3-16. Addressable Relay Output Device
3-3.18 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting
particles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon
smoke detection, the system can be programmed to con-
trol a variety of devices such as HVAC fans and power
shutdown which can prevent unnecessary damage to a
facility.
The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD-
7052 smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan

cover over
the detection chamber allows visual inspection of the duct
detector chamber and the internal smoke detector status.
Sampling of the air in the duct is accomplished through
the use of sampling tubes, which extend into the HVAC
duct. (See Figure 3-17.)
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing:
P/N 70-403001-100
Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion De-
tector: P/N 70-403001-052
Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo
Detector: P/N 70-403001-152
Refer to DH-2000 Installation Manual (P/N 06-235398-001)
for further details.
MTG. SCREW
DETECTOR HEAD
ION OR PHOTO
AND O-RING
EXHAUST TUBE
(MOLDED INTO
ENCLOSURE)
COVER
DETECTOR
VIEW PORT
END PLUG
INLET TUBE
(SUPPLY)
D
U
C
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
M
O
D
E
L
D
H
-2
0
0
0
ENCLOSURE
Figure 3-17. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
3-3.19 Loop Isolator Devices
The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop
isolation, which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short
conditions (NFPA 72, Style 7). The isolators will open the
loop between two isolators in the presence of a short cir-
cuit condition, thus allowing the remainder of the loop to
operate normally. However, a trouble indication for the de-
vices affected by the isolation will be created on the panel.
The isolators will return to normal operation when the short
condition has been removed from the affected wires. (See
Figures 3-18, 3-19 and 3-20.)
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-11
The loop isolators are offered in three package styles:
Stand-alone style. Housed in a single gang elec-
trical box arrangement.
6-inch Detector Base Mount. Allows the unit to be
mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6-inch
detector base.
Direct mount. Mounts directly onto the RX/TX mod-
ule.
The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs
which allow the device to indicate in which direction the
short condition is being detected. In normal standby mode,
the LED will be extinguished and in activated condition,
the LED will be on continuously.
Loop Isolator RX/TX mount: P/N 74-200012-001
Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang):
P/N 74-200012-002
Loop Isolator 6-inch detector base mount:
P/N 74-200012-004
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
R
X
/
T
X
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
S H O R T - 1 S H O R T - 2
DS2 DS1
J1
FOR MODULE INSTALL.
P/N 74-200016-001
INSTALLATION MANUAL
REFER TO
PROCEDURES
Laboratories Inc.
Underwriters
R
LISTED
R
Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
Figure 3-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
Laboratories
Underwriters
R
LISTED
Figure 3-20. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount
3-3.20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM)
Used in conjunction with an ORION XT, the PEGAsys
Addressable Loop Module permits direct connection of a
High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to the signaling
line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. Detailed informa-
tion about the PALM can be found in the ORION XT instal-
l ati on, operati on and mai ntenance manual , P/N
06-236005-401. (See Figure 3-21.)
The PALM allows an HSSD to be monitored like a
SmartOne initiating device. Both pre-alarm and alarm sig-
nals are reported.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Figure 3-21. PALM Interface Module for
ORION XT HSSD
The ORION XT HSSD is configured via a computer run-
ning ORION Configuration Software (OCS), Version 2.0.
All configuration data and smoke history is stored in the
ORION XT.
OCS may also be used to set the PALM RX/TX loop ad-
dress. However, if the address is set in this fashion, it must
then be 'Registered' at the PEGAsys CCM. PALM loop
addresses may also be set from the CCM (default setting
is 1000) in the same fashion as other loop modules.
Note: PALM addresses cannot be set via the hand-held
programmer (P/N 74-200013-001).
3-3.21 Addressable AlarmLine Module
The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
PEGAsys Control Unit. Refer to Appendix M for a full de-
scription of this Module. (See Figure 3-22.)
TM
Figure 3-22. Addressable AlarmLine Module
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-12
3-3.22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits
notification appliances to be controlled via commands is-
sued from the PEGAsys Control Units signaling line cir-
cuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical
box.
Refer to Appendix K for additional details on the Address-
able Signal/Sounder Module. (See Figure 3-23.)
A B B A
- + - + + - - +
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
DEVICE
ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ AUX./AUDIO MODE
SETTINGS
PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
_ _ _ _
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ADDRESS #
SETTINGS
AUDIO
P1=1&2
MODE
S1=3 ON
AUX. IN
+ - + -
TROUBLE
CKT. -
OUTPUT CKT.
- + +
AUX./AUDIO MODE
AUXILIARY
MODE
P1=2&3
S1=1&2 ON
PC LINE
A B A B
DEVICE
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
FM
APPROVED
R L
U
TM
Figure 3-23. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-1
CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
4-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the
PEGAsys. These procedures should be accomplished
on a scheduled basis. In the event that system problems
are found during the performance of a procedure, refer to
Chapter 5 for corrective action.
4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The scheduled maintenance of the system should be per-
formed at an established interval. The interval that the main-
tenance procedures are performed should not exceed any
imposed regulations (NFPA 72 or local codes).
4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following paragraphs outline general scheduled main-
tenance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary
basis.
4-3.1 Lamp Test
This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test fol-
lows:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
3. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display
reads:
***LAMP TEST***
***VERSION XX.X***
Where XX.X corresponds to the CCM Firmware
Version.
4. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit:
AC POWER ALARM
PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY SILENCE
4-3.2 Loop Device Test
Note: This test has a pass or fail result. It will not acti-
vate alarm outputs on the system. All system out-
puts must be isolated prior to running this test
procedure.
The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test func-
tion, which allows a user to initiate a test of the detection
devices through the use of the system menus and verify
that the detection device(s) is operating as intended. The
test actually stimulates the detection chamber of the de-
vice and verifies the response from the device. The CCM
will report a result of the test for each device tested.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test
follows:
Note: Addressable output modules and PALM modules
cannot be tested with this procedure.
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
3. Press the number two (2) key. Verify that the display
reads:
START DEVICE TEST
TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
4. Enter the device address or range of device addresses
to be tested, and then press the return button.
5. Verify the display scrolls through each selected ad-
dress and reads as below:
START DEVICE TEST
TESTING (Device Address #)
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-2
6. When the device testing is completed the display will
read:
TEST COMPLETED
(Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED)
7. Press the <SCROLL> button to read the status of each
device tested.
4-3.3 Battery Test
This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify
battery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform
the battery test follows:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
3. Press the number three (3) key. Verify that the display
reads:
BATTERY TEST
BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _
4. Enter the power supply address which the batteries
are connected to. Verify the display reads:
BATTERY TEST
TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _)
5. Upon the completion of the test the display will read:
TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED
>_>_ _._V
6. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances.
4-3.4 Walk Test
The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test
function. This allows the service person to enable a group
of devices for walk test, then proceed through the installa-
tion activating the specified devices. The system will re-
spond to each activation with a short burst of the
programmed signal circuits. The related signal circuit will
only be pulsed if it has been configured for the Walk Test
feature when defining it in the PCS software.
During the system installation/configuration via PCS, the
installer needs to enable each signal circuit installed in the
system for Walk Test, if desired. The system's signal out-
puts default to walk test disabled. When walk test is acti-
vated and carried out, the system enters each activation
with a time and date stamp. The operator can then print
out all walk test results for review.
The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways: the
service person can deactivate it through the user menus,
or the walk test function will time out after ten (10) minutes
of non-activation (this ensures system response if the ser-
vice person is called away for an extended period of time).
Note: When the walk test is active, the panel will annun-
ciate a trouble condition.
4-3.4.1 WALK TESTING DETECTORS
Place the system in walk test, as described in Paragraph
4-3.4.2. To place a detector into alarm, perform the appli-
cable procedure below:
Smoke DetectorsWhen testing SmartOne

smoke
detectors, use a "punk-stick" or "cotton wick" to gen-
erate smoke. Apply smoke to the detector for a mini-
mum of ten (10) seconds. When a sufficient amount
of smoke has entered the device, the control panel
will respond with an alarm. The status LED of the de-
tector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the
alarm period. Aerosol smoke simulation may be used
if acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and
if the product is used as directed in the instructions.
Heat DetectorsWhen testing SmartOne heat detec-
tors, use of a low powered heat gun is acceptable.
Heat the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds.
When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected
by the detector, the control panel will respond with an
alarm indication. The status LED of the detector will
flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period.
Take care during the heating of the detector to avoid
overheating the plastic housing. Maintain a minimum
of one (1) foot between the detector and the heat gun
nozzle. Use of open flame devices is not recommended
as discoloration of the plastic housing is likely, which
in turn, creates a potentially hazardous practice.
4-3.4.2 WALK TEST PROCEDURE
The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test is as
follows:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-3
3. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display
reads:
4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST
4. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:START WALK TEST 2:STOP WALK TEST
5. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display
reads:
START DEVICE WALK TEST
WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _)
6. After completion of the walk test, press the number
two (2) key to disable the walk test mode.
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST)
The PEGAsys system provides a feature that allows the
system installer/inspector to verify the actual output op-
eration in relation to the input(s) that are programmed to
activate the output of interest. The service person would
enable the AST function for a particular input and the sys-
tem would operate the output(s) as it is programmed in
the Event Output Control program. The system will respond
with an alarm condition when the AST feature is enabled.
The user would have to disable the AST when output op-
eration has been verified.
WARNING
!
Any outputs that are controlling critical
processes or agent releasing should be
physically disconnected from the process or
agent container to avoid unwanted shutdowns
and/or agent releases. When the AST function
is enabled, the pre-programmed outputs for the
activated input(s) will activate.
4-3.5.1 AST PROCEDURE
The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows:
1. Be sure to observe the above warning.
2. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
3. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
4. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display
reads:
4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST
5. Press the number five (5) key. Verify that the display
reads:
ALARM SIMULATION TEST
DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _
6. Type in the selected device address and then press
the return key. Verify that the display reads:
ALARM SIMULATION TEST
1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE
7. Press the number one (1) key and then the return key.
Verify that the system responds as programmed.
8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the
alarm.
9. Deactivate the AST programming as follows:
a. Repeat steps 2 through 8.
b. Press number two (2) key and then return ( ).
4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE
CIRCUITS
The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must
be performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to
proceeding, be sure the notes below from NFPA 72, Chap-
ter 10, are understood.
Note: IMPORTANT-
1. "Testing personnel shall be familiar with the spe-
cific arrangement and operation of the suppres-
sion system(s) and releasing function(s) and be
cognizant of the hazards associated with inadvert-
ent system discharge."
2. "Occupant notification shall be required whenever
a fire alarm system configured for releasing ser-
vice is being serviced or tested."
3. "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall
not be required by this code. Suppression systems
shall be secured from inadvertent actuation, in-
cluding disconnection of releasing solenoids/elec-
tric actuators, closing of valves, other actions, or
combinations thereof, as appropriate for the spe-
cific system, for the duration of the fire system test-
ing."
4. "Testing shall include verification that the releas-
ing circuits and components energized or actuated
by the fire alarm system are electrically supervised
and operate as intended on alarm."
5. "Suppression systems and releasing components
shall be returned to their normal condition upon
completion of system testing."
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-4
4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits
Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to sys-
tem testing.
1. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
(refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
WARNING
!
Use safety precautions when removing
solenoids to prevent unwanted discharge or
activation.
2. Physically remove the control heads or solenoids at
the storage containers.
WARNING
!
The suppression system is now fully disarmed
from all automatic activation and, in some
cases, all manual activation.
3. The system can now be tested without the risk of an
inadvertent release of agent.
4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits
Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon comple-
tion of system testing.
1. Verify that all control heads or solenoids are discon-
nected from storage containers.
2. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
(refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
3. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent
unwanted discharge or activation.
4. Reconnect the control heads or solenoids at the
storage containers.
5. De-isolate agent release circuit(s).
6. The system is now in full operation in accordance with
system programming.
4-5 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM
4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure
The procedure to power-down the system is as follows:
1. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms
to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. Also en-
sure that any supervisory or trouble events have been
acknowledged.
CAUTION
!
If alarms do exist during power-down, power-
up of the panel will cause a reactivation of the
alarm sequence and possible activation of the
suppression system.
2. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1.
3. Remove DC power first by disconnecting the batter-
ies.
4. Remove AC power second by shutting off the circuit
breaker to the panel.
4-6 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM
4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure
1. Ensure that all control heads or solenoids are discon-
nected from the storage containers to prevent un-
wanted discharge or activation.
2. If the system has been powered down, energize the
system by performing the following steps:
a. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON.
Verify that the display reads "Main Processor
Power On". Ensure that the audible device is buzz-
ing continuously.
b. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that
the audible device is silenced.
c. Verify that the display reads as follows:
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
d. After ten (10) seconds, verify that the display reads
as follows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
Note: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/
TX module in the system while the system initial-
izes itself. This initialization can take up to 90 sec-
onds.
e. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indi-
cators are lit.
f. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply
in accordance to the procedure in Chapter 7.
g. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approxi-
mately one minute the display for each RX/TX will
momentarily read:
RXTX "N" NON-MONITORING TROUBLE
OFF
Note: "N" will sequentially correspond to each RX/TX in
the system.
h. Verify the display reads the correct time and date.
If the incorrect time is displayed, perform step 2.i.
i. Set time and date as follows:
aa. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display
reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
bb. Type in the default first level password (987).
cc. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the dis-
play reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-5
dd. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the
display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
ee. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key.
Verify that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM 2:PM
ff. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2
for PM).
gg. Set the date in an analogous procedure, as in
steps dd and ee above.
3. Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
4-6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
5-1
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5-1 INTRODUCTION
The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by
first reading the entire manual. The service technician must
have a sure understanding of the purpose and correct func-
tion of the module/device before attempting corrective
maintenance. This chapter contains instructions to aid a
technician in locating faulty modules/devices.
This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and
replacement of the replaceable modules/devices of the
PEGAsys system.
WARNING
!
All service to panel must be done with panel
powered down to prevent damage to panel
components, personnel injury, or both.
5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION
TECHNIQUES
Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will
usually be caused by one or more of the following faults:
Failure of the power supply
Damaged or faulty wiring
Component failure
When a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check
as many of these items as is practical before starting a
detailed check. If possible, obtain information about any
changes taking place that may affect the system.
5-2.1 Visual Inspection
When troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered
through visual inspection alone. Some faults, such as
shorted transformers or wiring, can be located by sight or
smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or over-
heated parts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspec-
tion is also useful in avoiding damage to the system which
could occur through improper servicing methods. See Table
5-1, Troubleshooting Index, and the paragraphs of this
chapter for troubleshooting beyond visual inspection.
5-2.2 Power Checks
Many faults on the system can be caused by problems
with power. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked
prior to troubleshooting the system.
5-3 TROUBLESHOOTING
The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for
continuous system testing. Most system faults can be iso-
lated through the operation of the front panel. Users/tech-
nicians can initiate various testing via the use of the system
menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid
password.
Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index
e c i v e D / e l u d o M
d e l i a t e D
n o i t a r t s u l l I
l a n o i t c n u F
n o i t p i r c s e D
h p a r g a r a P
t n e m e c a l p e R
e r u d e c o r P
l o r t n o C l a r t n e C
e l u d o M
3 - 3 1 . 3 - 3 2 . 4 - 5
r e t t i m s n a r T / r e v i e c e R
e l u d o M
4 - 3 2 . 3 - 3 3 . 4 - 5
e l u d o M y l p p u S r e w o P 5 - 3 3 . 3 - 3 6 . 7 - 7 d n a 5 . 7 - 7
p o o L - i t l u M
d r a o b r e h t o M
6 - 3 d n a 7 - 1
- 3 d n a 6 . 2 - 1
4 . 3
d r a o b r e h t o M c i s a B 6 - 1 5 . 2 - 1 5 - 7
e l u d o M t u p t u O l a n g i S 7 - 3 5 . 3 - 3 1 . 7 - 7
e l u d o M t u p t u O y a l e R 8 - 3 6 . 3 - 3 2 . 7 - 7
e s a e l e R t n e g A
e l u d o M
9 - 3 7 . 3 - 3 3 . 7 - 7
e l u d o M e i T y t i C 0 1 - 3 8 . 3 - 3 4 . 7 - 7
y a l p s i D e t o m e R
s e l u d o M
1 1 - 3 9 . 3 - 3 L x i d n e p p A
r e v i r D s e i r e S M T A
s e l u d o M
2 1 - 3 0 1 . 3 - 3
l a u n a M
2 0 0 - 9 7 1 6 3 2 - 6 0 N / P
e c a f r e t n I k r o w t e N
d r a C
3 1 - 3 1 1 . 3 - 3 J x i d n e p p A
e c i v e D d l e i F 4 1 - 3 2 1 . 3 - 3 4 . 4 - 5
t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A
e c i v e D t u p n I
5 1 - 3 6 1 . 3 - 3 5 1 - 7
y a l e R e l b a s s e d d A
e c i v e D t u p t u O
6 1 - 3 7 1 . 3 - 3 6 1 - 7
g n i s u o H t c u D r i A 7 1 - 3 8 1 . 3 - 3 l a u n a M e e S
s r o t a l o s I p o o L
u r h t 8 1 - 3
0 2 - 3
9 1 . 3 - 3
h t i w e s u r o f M L A P
D S S H T X N O I R O
1 2 - 3 0 2 . 3 - 3 0 0 1 . 7 7 l a u n a M e e S
e l b a s s e r d d A
e l u d o M e n i L m r a l A
2 2 - 3 1 2 . 3 - 3 M x i d n e p p A
e l b a s s e r d d A
r e d n u o S / l a n g i S
e l u d o M
3 2 - 3 2 2 . 3 - 3 K x i d n e p p A
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
5-2
5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
The following paragraphs provide required tools and step-
by-step replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The pro-
cedures should also be used to assist in module and device
installation.
CAUTION
!
Some components are subject to damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). These
components are not to be removed from their
protective wrappings until they are to be
installed in their respective equipment
locations, and then only by personnel
connected to earth ground.
5-4.1 Required Tools
The following tools will be required to perform the removal
and replacement procedures.
Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver
6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver
No. 2 cross-head Screwdriver
Wire Stripper
Small Needle Nose Pliers
Ground Strap
5-4.2 Central Control Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure for replacing the CCM.
1. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.
2. Remove all field wiring and internal cables.
3. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the
CCM in place.
4. Remove CCM from cabinet.
5. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physi-
cal damage.
6. Install new CCM in the reverse order of the removal
steps (listed above).
5-4.3 RX/TX Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure for replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the
system configuration. (See Figure 5-1 or 5-2.)
Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during
the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on
the RX/TX Module conform to the wiring style of the sys-
tem being installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the fac-
tory programmed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I
for the jumper locations on the RX/TX module. The set-
tings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), with 7 being
used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are
noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the
module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configu-
rations you can select along with their respective jumpers.
1. Disconnect plug from terminal T1.
2. Remove the two mounting screws from the module
and move module to gain access to connected wiring.
3. Remove the plug from the RS-232 port.
4. Remove power plug from connector jack J1.
5. Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect
for physical damage.
6. Ensure jumper configuration is set.
7. Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of the removal
steps (listed above).
Figure 5-1. Single Loop Installation
I/O
M
O
D
U
LE
M
O
D
U
LE
R
X
/TX
Figure 5-2. Multi-Loop Installation
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
5-3
Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper Style 4 Style 6
Style 6 w/
Loop
Isolator
Style 7
W1 and W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted
JP2 Shorted Shorted Open Open
JP3 Shorted Shorted Open Open
Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop iso-
lators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one
(1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to oper-
ate in the Style 7 configuration.
5-4.4 Field Devices
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to replace field devices in the PEGAsys system.
Note: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced with-
out powering down the system. When adding new
loop devices to the system, the panel will need to
be powered down.
If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared
prior to removal from the system. If the alarm can-
not be cleared, physically remove the device from
the system, acknowledge all current system events
and power down the system to re-initialize it. Once
the system is online, insert the replacement de-
vice onto the loop.
1. Identify the defective device to be replaced.
2. Remove the defective device from the PC Line.
3. Record the model number and device type.
4. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify
that the model number is the same as the defective
device.
5. Set the address of the new device to the same as the
defective device using the procedure in Paragraph
2-8.6.
6. Connect the new device to the PC Line where the de-
fective device was removed, if not accomplished in
the previous step. Use the same detector base or elec-
trical box of the defective device.
7. Perform the appropriate test listed below:
Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection
Devices.
Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or automatic
initiating device.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
5-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
6-1
SYSTEMS
PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/ 76-100000-501
Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with one Multi-Loop 76-100000-600
Motherboard, one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Central Control Module (CCM), Single-Loop 76-100008-501/
76-100008-701
Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-Loop 76-100008-600/
76-100008-800
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. Power Supply 76-100009-010
RX/TX Module for Single Loop System 76-100005-001
RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System 76-100005-002
Main Enclosure 76-100000-502
MODULES
Agent Release Module 76-100001-001
Signal Output Module 76-100003-001
Relay Output Module 76-100004-001
City Tie Module 76-100002-001
Motherboard for eight (8) Optional Output Modules 76-100007-001
Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to eight (8) RX/TX or seven (7) Output Modules 76-100017-001
Network Interface Card 76-100036-500
Remote Display Control Module 76-300000-502
Remote Display Module 76-300000-501
ATM-L Annunciator Driver Board 76-200004-032
ATM-R Relay Driver Board 76-200005-032
POWER SUPPLIES
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) 76-100009-002
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-003
CHAPTER 6
PARTS LIST
6-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system parts list (Table 6-1) provides a
list of all repair parts.
NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
6-2
NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) 76-100000-505
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and four (4) Power Supplies 76-100000-006
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting eight (8) Power Supplies 76-100000-007
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two (2) I/O Motherboards 76-100000-008
Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries 76-100010-001
Battery 12 V, 17 AH 06-115915-046
Battery 12 V, 33 AH 89-100052-001
Battery 12 V, 12 AH 06-115915-047
SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES
Intelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152 71-402001-100
Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052 70-402001-100
Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 70-404001-100
6-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB 70-400001-100
4-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB 70-400001-101
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.) 70-407008-001
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.) 70-407008-002
Addressable Loop Module for ORION XT 77-297103-000
Addressable Relay Output Device 70-408004-001
Loop Isolator1 Gang Box Mounted 74-200012-002
Loop IsolatorDetector Base Mounted 74-200012-004
Loop IsolatorRXTX Mounted 74-200012-001
Alarm Signal/Sounder Module 70-200200-001
Addressable AlarmLine Module 73-100001-001
Addressable AlarmLine Module in NEMA-4 Enclosure 73-100003-001
DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS
DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed 70-403001-100
DH-2000 PSDIDuct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed 70-403001-152
DH-2000 CPDIDuct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed 70-403001-052
Sampling Tube12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length.
Order sampling tubes that approximate duct width. 06-129500-001
Sampling Tube24" 06-129500-002
Sampling Tube48" 06-129500-003
Sampling Tube72" 06-129500-004
Sampling Tube96" 06-129500-005
Sampling Tube120" 06-129500-006
Exhaust Tube Kit 06-129554-001
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
6-3
NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)
MISCELLANEOUS
Handheld Device Programmer 74-200013-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals 74-100016-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 74-100016-002
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers 74-100016-003
DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129341-001
DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129317-003
DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer 06-129373-001
PCS Version 7.X Software 76-100035-002
PCS Version 8.X Software (for use with ORION XT Detectors) 76-100040-001
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
6-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-1
CHAPTER 7
INSTALLATION
7-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information necessary to install the
PEGAsys system. Installation consists of installing a
complete system. The procedures in this chapter should
be accomplished by technicians familiar with fire alarm sys-
tem installation and the requirements of relevant NFPA
regulations.
7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR
INSTALLATION
The materials listed below are not supplied with the sys-
tem, but are required for installation:
No. 10 or -inch Mounting Hardware
Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power
4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required)
Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required)
Ground Strap (for handling printed circuit boards)
7-3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL
The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches
high x 18 inches wide x 5 inches deep. It is designed to
be surface or semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or -inch
hardware. The type of hardware to be used is at the dis-
cretion of the installer, but must be in accordance with good
electrical and safety practices.
Figure 7-1 shows the hole layout of the enclosure mount-
ing area. The lower set of mounting holes should typically
be 44 inches from the floor in order for the display panel to
be at a convenient viewing height.
To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, re-
move the enclosures front door. Disconnect the ground
wire before removing the door.
To remove the front door, open the door approximately
90 from its closed position and lift it up enough to allow
the doors hinge pins to clear their mating hinge sockets
located on the left side of the Central Control Panel.
Place the mounting screws into the top two holes in the
wall. Leave approximately -inch of both screws exposed.
Carefully place the two key holes over the screws in the
wall. Ensure the enclosure has its door hinge sockets lo-
cated to the left as you face the enclosure. Allow the en-
closure to gently come to rest on the screws. Tighten the
screws.
18"
28"
16"
25.375"
(FLOOR)
44"
Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing
With the enclosure held by the top two screws, place the
bottom two mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws.
Reinstall the enclosure door at this time. Care must be
taken when installing the door to ensure that the hinge pins
are lined up correctly.
7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
EXPANSION ENCLOSURES
The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a
backplate installed in the enclosure to meet various sys-
tem component requirements. The expansion enclosure
maintains the same outside dimensions as the main sys-
tem enclosure. There are three versions of the backplate:
An output module cardcage with mounting provisions
for up to four (4) power supplies
Mounting provisions for up to eight (8) power supplies
Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to six-
teen (16) output modules in the expansion enclosure.
The optional output motherboard and output modules must
be installed prior to the system being powered up. The
output bus (communications) and 24 Vdc power are at-
tached to connectors located on the output motherboard.
Note: The internal communications bus (RS-485) wiring
must be enclosed in a raceway from the main en-
closure for a maximum run of 20 feet, with expan-
sion enclosures located in the same room as the
main enclosure.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-2
Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which provides
mounting for four (4) power supplies and one (1) output
motherboard. Figure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate
which provides mounting for up to eight (8) auxiliary power
supplies. Figure 7-4 shows the expansion backplate which
provides mounting for two (2) output motherboards.
To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fas-
ten it to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the
nuts supplied with the enclosure.
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
06-129562-001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V RET
24V 24V RET RET
24V RET BAT
+ -
AUX 1
AUX 2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN1
AC OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N AC IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06-129562-001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V RET
24V 24V RET RET
24V RET BAT
+ -
AUX 1
AUX 2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN1
AC OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N AC IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
Figure 7-2. Back Plate, Output Motherboard and
Four Power Supplies
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
06-1 29562-0 01
N O N C
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R ET
24V 24V R ET R ET
24V R ET BAT
+ -
AU X1
AU X2
DC IN 2
C
D CIN 1
ACO U T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SH R TP4 TP3
D S1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R ET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06-1 29562-0 01
N O N C
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R ET
24V 24V R E T R ET
24V R ET BAT
+ -
AU X1
AUX2
DC IN 2
C
D CIN 1
ACO U T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
D S1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R ET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06-1 29562-0 01
N O NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R ET
24V 24V R ET R ET
24V R ET BAT
+ -
AU X1
AU X2
DC IN 2
C
D CIN 1
ACO U T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SH R TP4 TP3
D S1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R ET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06-1 29562-0 01
N O N C
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R ET
24V 24V R E T R ET
24V R ET BAT
+ -
AU X1
AU X2
DC IN 2
C
D CIN 1
ACO U T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
D S1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R ET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
Figure 7-3. Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
Figure 7-4. Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards
7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install an output motherboard into a single-loop
system.
1. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the en-
closure.
2. Insert and tighten the twelve (12) mounting screws pro-
vided with the motherboard.
3. Connect the 24 Vdc wiring from the power supply to
terminal TB1.
4. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER
BD connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the
motherboard.
7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX
MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure for installing an RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5.
Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the pro-
cedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/
TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being
installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory pro-
grammed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I for jumper
locations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to
set the wiring style (4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop iso-
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-3
lators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x
and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board.
Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you
can select along with their respective jumpers.
I/O
MODULE
MODULE RX/TX
Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop
Table 7-1. RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper Style 4 Style 6
Style 6
w/Loop Isolator
Style 7
W1 and W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted
JP2 Shorted Shorted Open Open
JP3 Shorted Shorted Open Open
Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop iso-
lators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one
(1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to oper-
ate in Style 7 configuration.
1. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for
physical damage.
2. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1
settings for wiring styles.
3. Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used.
4. Connect 24 Vdc wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8)
to 24 Vdc input plug J1. The terminal block which will
be used to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon
which slot the RX/TX will be installed into.
5. Install the short, 6-conductor cable from the RS-232
port on the RX/TX to the appropriate RJ-12 sockets
JP1-JP8. The socket selected is dependant upon which
slot the RX/TX will be installed into.
6. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket in the
PEGAsys, adjacent to its communications socket JP1
to JP8. Install the two mounting screws and tighten
until snug.
7. Remove the RX/TX by reversing the installation steps
(listed above).
Note: Since the RX/TXs are not addressed by switches,
the communications socket they are connected to
will become their address. Example: An RX/TX
connected to JP1 on the multi-loop motherboard
will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the same RX/TX
was moved to JP4, the address would become
RX/TX 4, Loop 4.
7-7 INSTALLATION OF OUTPUT MODULES
The output modules can be inserted into the motherboard
in any order. The CCM automatically reads the output mod-
ules type and address upon PCS configuration upload.
However, it is recommended that modules performing like
functions be placed adjacent to each other to facilitate iden-
tification and field wiring runs. After powering up the sys-
tem, a list of output module assignments can be requested
from the system menu to verify the registration and accu-
racy of module address(es).
CAUTION
!
All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys
equipment must wear a grounding strap when
working in the Central Control panel to avoid
generating static electricity which can destroy
integrated circuits. Output module printed
circuit boards are shipped in antistatic plastic
bags and should be kept in these bags until
they are installed. When the circuit boards are
removed from the motherboard, they should
be replaced into the appropriate bags. NEVER
PACK THESE BOARDS IN STYROFOAM OR
PLASTIC PELLETS.
WARNING
!
Output modules should never be installed in a
powered-up system. Always disconnect both
AC and battery power before installing or
removing modules.
To remove an output module from the system, remove all
power, remove terminal block from module, remove the
two (2) mounting screws and pull out the module.
The following paragraphs describe the installation proce-
dure for each available output module type.
7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys
system.
1. Remove the signal audible output module from pack-
ing and inspect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate A/B wiring styles.
See Appendix I for jumper settings.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-4
4. Cut jumper between W9 and W10 if using an auxiliary
24 Vdc power input.
5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con-
nector mates properly.
6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 5-
1 or 5-2.
7-7.2 Relay Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys sys-
tem.
1. Remove the relay output module from packing and in-
spect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con-
nector mates properly.
4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure
5-1 or 5-2.
7-7.3 Agent Release Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install an agent release module into the PEGAsys
system.
1. Remove the agent release module from packing and
inspect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. Set switches S3 and S4 for solenoid activation. See
Appendix I for switch settings.
4. Cut jumper between W1 and W2 if using an auxiliary
24 Vdc power input.
5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con-
nector mates properly.
6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure
5-1 or 5-2.
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys
system.
1. Remove the city-tie module from packing and inspect
for physical damage.
2. Set module configuration. See Appendix I.
3. Install module in the motherboard. Ensure the con-
nector mates properly.
4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure
5-1 or 5-2.
7-7.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the
PEGAsys system.
1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from
packing and inspect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. See Figure 7-6 to determine the wiring connections
between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Sup-
ply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply).
4. See Appendix I for jumper settings.
5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate
of the main or expansion enclosure.
6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into
the four corners of the mounting plate.
a t t r i b u t e ?a t t r i b u t e ?a t t r i b u t e ?a t t r i b u t e ? a t t r i b u t e ? a t t r i b u t e ?a t t r i b u t e ?2
4
V
R
E
T
AC OUT
1
AC IN
2
2
4
V
R
E
T
N L N L N
DC IN 1
L G
DC IN 2
S
P
V
S
P
V
S
H
A
R
E
WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK
BLK
VIO
RED
RED
ORN
WHT
BLK/WHT
ORN
RED
BLK
VIO
BLK
RED
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-010)
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-002)
Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram
7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion
Enclosure
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the
expansion enclosure.
1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from
packing and inspect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. See Figure 7-7 to determine the wiring connections
between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Sup-
ply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply).
4. See Appendix I for jumper settings.
5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate
of the expansion enclosure.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-5
6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the
four corners of the mounting plate.
Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to
Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
y l p p u S r e w o P . x u A n o i t c n u F y l p p u S n i a M
e t i h W ) l a r t u e N ( t u p n I C A N 2 t u O C A
e t i h W / k c a l B ) t o H ( t u p n I C A L 2 t u O C A
d e R ) . s o P ( t u p t u O C D V 4 2 2 n I C D
k c a l B ) . g e N ( t u p t u O C D t e R 2 n I C D
t e l o i V n o i s i v r e p u S v p u S 2 n I C D
e g n a r O e r a h S e r a h S
7-7.7 Power Supply Communication Connections
The main power supply communicates with the CCM over
the internal RS-485 bus of the PEGAsys system, and can
be connected in different ways. The power supply unit in
the main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates
with the CCM over a short phone style cable. The bus ex-
tends out of the power supply when needed, i.e., to a
motherboard or other power supply installed in an expan-
sion enclosure. These two examples are accomplished as
follows:
1. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main
enclosure: a flat 6-conductor phone type cable is at-
tached to CON 2 of power supply and then inserted
into the RJ-12 jack on the motherboard labeled RS-
485. Remove jumper W4 on the main power supply
to enable the terminating resistor on the motherboard.
The terminating resistor is used to ensure good RS-
485 communications.
2. Power supplies installed in an expansion enclosure
without a motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal
block (TB1). This connection allows the installer to con-
nect a twisted-pair, 18 AWG cable to terminals A and
B of TB1 on the power supply in the main enclosure
and connect to the same terminals on the power sup-
pl y i n the expansi on encl osure, as shown i n
Figure 7-8. This connection must be daisy-chained to
other power supplies in the expansion enclosure, if
installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from all power
supplies in line, and all in-line motherboard terminat-
ing jumpers must also be removed, except from the
last power supply unit or motherboard in the expan-
sion enclosure. This will maintain the terminating re-
sistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is required
to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communi-
cations. Loop the RS-485 wiring. Do not use T-tap-
ping.
Figure 7-8. RS-485 Connection
7-8 CONNECTING AC POWER
AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panels
internal power supply using three conductors. The AC
power cable is to be run through a conduit from a dedi-
cated, 15 Amp circuit breaker. The conduit must be at-
tached to the right side of the Central Control Panel
enclosure through one of the knockouts near the upper
right corner of the enclosure.
See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirement details.
WARNING
!
High voltages may be present when
connecting AC power to the Central Control
Panel. Suitable precautions must be taken to
avoid injury.
Note: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of -
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
cable per NEC Article 760.
Ensure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power
source is in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power
conductors to TB1 on the Central Control Panel power sup-
ply PCB (see Appendix I).
Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK
BLK
VIO
RED
RED
ORN
attribute?
attribute?
attribute?
attribute?
attribute?
attribute?
attribute?
24V
RET
A
C
O
U
T
1
A
C
IN
2
24V
RET
N
L
N
L
N
D
C
IN
1
L
G
D
C
IN
2
SPV
SPV
SHARE
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-010)
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-003)
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-6
7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER
Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two
12 V, 33 AH sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-hour
standby operation.
7-9.1 Battery Enclosure
A separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure
7-9 (P/N 76-100010-001), is used to house up to two 12 V,
40 AH, sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is de-
signed to be surface mounted using only hardware similar
to that used on the CCP (see Paragraph 7-3) and must be
mounted within 100 feet of the panel.
Note: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must
be sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable volt-
age drops.
7-9.2 Batteries
Refer to Appendix A for required system power calcula-
tions. Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprin-
kler requirements for 90-hour standby periods.
Recommended battery manufacturers and models are:
Standby
Time Battery
24 Hours Panasonic LCR 12 V 17AP,17 AH
(P/N 06-115915-046)
60 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
90 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
The batteries should be rated for standby power use and
fit within the physical dimensions of the respective enclo-
sure. The batteries must have terminals that accept stan-
dard ring-type solderless connectors. (See Figure 7-9.)
KNOCKOUTS FOR
.50 CONDUIT
(3 PLACES)
VENT BOTH
SIDES
8.25
18
0.94
20
12
10
0.94
DOOR
Figure 7-9. Battery Enclosure
CAUTION
!
Do not connect the batteries to the system
power supply at this time. Connect the
batteries at the end of system installation.
Connection to the power supply must be according to the
instructions in Appendix I.
7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX
MODULE
Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on
the PEGAsys Systems Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/
TX). The cable connecting the field devices to the RX/TX
module provides power and bi-directional communications
to the loop devices. One RX/TX module can support up to
255 SmartOne

addressable field devices. These 255 ad-

dresses can be any mixture of intelligent loop device in-
puts and outputs without restriction.
Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of -
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
cable per NEC Article 760.
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line
The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP)
for communications with intelligent loop devices. The PC
Line may be configured in NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 or 7. The
PC Line is capable of supporting 255 intelligent loop de-
vices on a 2-wire loop.
In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long
as it meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When
installing new wiring or using existing wiring, it is neces-
sary to check line resistance and capacitance. Total line
resistance cannot be greater than 26 Ohms, and capaci-
tance can not exceed 0.25 microFarad. Kidde recommends
the use of No. 18 AWG minimum twisted, unshielded, low-
capacitance fire alarm wiring as the connection cable be-
tween the RX/TX Module and the field devices. See
Appendix H for recommended wiring.
The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to
the Central Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used,
must be attached through any convenient Central Control
Panel enclosure knockout. Route the connection cable to
TB1 on the RX/TX PCB and insert the end of each con-
nection cable wire into its proper TB1 slot. Tighten the slot
screws firmly. See Figure 7-10 for a conduit to CCP ex-
ample.
Twisted, Unshielded
Wire
TB1
Enclosure
RX/TX
Module
Figure 7-10. Conduit to CCP
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-7
In retrofit applications where existing wiring will be used,
do not exceed the SLC resistance and capacitance limita-
tions listed above. All conduit and conductors must meet
NEC, NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements.
See Figure 7-11 for existing shielded cable termination.
Optionally, the PC line can be installed in a separate con-
duit as shown previously, thus allowing the PC line to use
twisted, unshielded wire.
Grounding
Nut
Shielded
Wire
Enclosure
RX/TX
Module
TB1
Figure 7-11. Shielded Wire to CCP
Note: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their
address set to 000. This address is reserved for
unregistered devices and cannot be used as a reg-
istered address. The unaddressed devices must
be connected to the RX/TX Module one at a time
in order to address them. Otherwise devices may
be pre-addressed or multiple pre-addressed loop
devices may be connected to the RX/TX PC line
at the same time using the hand-held device pro-
grammer (P/N 74-200013-001) .
Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of the types of allowable con-
figurations that can be selected, along with the respective
jumper settings for those configurations. As described in
this chapter, the PC line can be configured in Style 4, 6
or 7. See Figures 7-12 through 7-15.
Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only
limited by sound installation techniques.
M
ODEL
AI,N/O
INSTRUCTIONS
SEE
INSTALLATION
CAT.NO.70-407008-001
S
m
artO
n
e
TM
FOR
SERVICE
SEND
TO:
KIDDE-FENW
AL,INC.
400
M
AIN
ST.
ASHLAND,M
A
01721
DATE
OF
M
ANUFACTURE:
M
AX.INSTALL.TEM
P.120F
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
06-235578-001
PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
8
A
SW
B
SW
(+)
LED
(-)
LED
ALLTERMINALSAREPOWERLIMITED
Addressable
Contact Input
Device
Detector Bases
T-Tap
TB1 of
RX/TX Module
Figure 7-12. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections
In the Style 6 wiring configurations, the RX/TX automati-
cally transmits data and power bi-directionally when a break
in the PC line wiring occurs. If the break is in a single con-
ductor, all loop devices will remain fully operational. For
Style 6 PC line connections, if a PC line open trouble is
encountered, use the system reset switch on the display
and control board to reset the PC line to normal once the
fault is corrected.
M
ODEL
AI,N/O
INSTRUCTIONS
SEE
INSTALLATION
CAT.NO.70-407008-001
S
m
a
rtO
n
e
TM
FOR
SERVICE
SEND
TO:
KIDDE-FENW
AL,INC.
400
M
AIN
ST.
ASHLAND,M
A
01721
DATE
OF
M
ANUFACTURE:
M
AX.INSTALL.TEM
P.120F
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
06-235578-001
PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
8
A
SW
B
SW
(+)
LED
(-)
LED
ALLTERMINALSAREPOWERLIMITED
TB1 of
RX/TX Module
Detector Bases
Addressable
Contact Input
Device
Figure 7-13. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections
Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72
Wiring Style 7 and are installed on the PC line of the RX/
TX module. Isolator packages are available for electrical
box mount (Single Gang), 6-inch base mount and an RX/
TX mount.
By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop
isolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A
zone is defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of
installation, a short circuit between any two loop isolators
will not affect any other zone. The isolators on each side
of the short will open the PC line.
Figure 7-15 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring
Diagram in Appendix I depict a typical NFPA Style 7
installation.
Note: The maximum number of loop devices that can
be connected between loop isolators is thirty (30).
During a short circuit fault condition, the control
panel will register a trouble condition for each de-
vice located between the two affected loop isola-
tors.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-8
Loop
Isolator
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
between loop isolators.
Detector
Base
TB1 of
RX/TX Module
Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with
Loop Isolators
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within
20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit.
74-200012-001
Mounted to RX/TX
LOOP ISOLATOR
4321
2
4
V
2
4
V
R
E
T
R
E
T
RX/TX
Loop
Isolator
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
See Note
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Figure 7-15. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection
7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive
alarm devices and communicate with central stations and
control equipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM
and optional output modules.
All field wiring to output devices is to be run from the out-
put device circuit to the field devices. The wiring must be
brought through any convenient Central Control Panel
enclosure knockout. Route the wiring to the terminal block
located on the respective output module, insert the end of
each wire into its proper terminal block slot, and tighten
the slot screws firmly.
Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on
their respective installation wiring diagrams located in the
Appendix I of this manual. Refer to the respective
manufacturers literature for specific installation instruc-
tions of output devices.
Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of -
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
cable per NEC Article 760.
7-12 EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR
CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 Vdc SPDT
relay on the power supply monitor module that de-ener-
gizes (normally powered) in the event of a power supply
trouble. Troubles include:
AC Power Failure
24 Vdc Power Supply Failure
Battery Failure
Ground Fault
Communications Failure
The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so
that, in the event of power failure, the relay will transfer to
the de-energized state. The contact can be used to signal
an external power supply trouble indicator.
The wiring to an external power supply trouble indicating
device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating
device to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be
attached to any convenient CCP enclosure knockout. Con-
nect wiring to TB1 on the CCPs power supply PCB, as
shown in Figure 3-5.
7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATION
Refer to the SmartOne

Smoke and Heat Detector Instal-

lation Sheet (P/N 74-212) for installation instructions. Also,
refer to Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and regis-
tering RCUs.
7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE AND
HEAT DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES
Set the sensitivity of SmartOne

ionization and photoelec-

tric smoke detectors and heat detectors by setting the
threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density and tem-
perature levels respectively. The SmartOne

smoke de-
tectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were previously
programmed for a device application during the registra-
tion process.
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-9
The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for par-
ticular applications. There are three applications which rep-
resent the majority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area
(High Air Flow) and Duct.
The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two
ways:
1. Smoke and Heat Detector Configuration. During the
process of configuring, the operator uses the PCS pro-
gram and selects the application of the detector and
adjusts the settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values
within the range for the application, or accepts the de-
fault values for the application.
2. Sensitivity Setting Operation. This procedure is se-
lected from the user menus. This method is generally
used for systems which have been installed and op-
erational for a period of time. It should only be used if
there is a need to change the sensitivity of the device.
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat
Detector Sensitivity Procedure
The step-by-step procedure to perform the sensitivity ad-
justment is as follows:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
c. Press the return ( ) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify
that the display reads:
1:IONIZATION 2:PHOTOELECTRIC
3:THERMAL (<) to return
3. Select the desired detector style which is to have its
sensitivity adjusted. After type selection, the system
displays:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _
Note: The user would enter the address range of the
detectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1
to 255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all
the specified type of detectors which were previ-
ously chosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range.
4. Press the return key and the display will read:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
PREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT)
The pre-alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are:
Device Open Area High Velocity
Ionization 0.51.5%/FT 0.51.0 %/FT
Photoelectric 0.23.5 %/FT 0.22.0 %/FT
Device 50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing
Thermal 80155F 80145F
5. This prompt asks the user for the pre-alarm level for
the detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre-alarm
level and press the return key. After pressing return
the display will read:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
ALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0/FT)
The alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are:
Device Open Area High Velocity
Ionization 0.51.5%/FT 0.51.0 %/FT
Photoelectric 0.53.5 %/FT 0.52.0 %/FT
Device 50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing
Thermal 135155F 135145F
6. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the
detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level
and press the return key. After pressing return the dis-
play will read:
LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS
7. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity ad-
justments were done on XX number of detectors. The
sensitivity for all specified detectors (depending on
which type was previously selected) will be as set in
this procedure.
7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT
DEVICE INSTALLATION
The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to
be installed in a North American 2-in. (64 mm) deep one-
gang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-in. (38 mm)
deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block
will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75
mm
2
respectively) with size #18 being a minimum require-
ment. Refer to the wiring the diagram in Appendix I for
specific connection information. Also refer to Paragraphs
2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other param-
eters. The installation must comply with national and local
electrical codes.
7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE
INSTALLATION
The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to
be installed in a North American 2 in. (64 mm) deep one-
gang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1 (38 mm)
deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AO terminal block
July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
7-10
will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75
mm
2
respectively) with size #18 being a minimum require-
ment. See Appendix I for specific connection information.
Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting ad-
dresses and other parameters. The installation must com-
ply with national and local electrical codes.
Note: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of -
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
cable per NEC Article 760.
7-17 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure
that the following has been completed:
Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and
System Power Supply are secured to the back of the
enclosure.
CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display As-
sembly, System Power Supply (communications bus
and 24 Vdc) and Remote RS-485 peripheral(s) if any.
CCM configuration jumpers configured correctly to en-
sure proper operation of the programmable (signal/
release) output (MP1).
Optional motherboard, if installed, is connected to the
CCM (communications bus) and system power sup-
ply (24 Vdc).
RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and
system power supply (24 Vdc).
Output modul es, i f used, are i nstal l ed i n the
motherboard, addressed correctly, configured for ap-
propriate mode of operation and their external wiring
is connected correctly.
Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Para-
graph 4-6.
Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and program-
ming.
7-18 CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS
The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a
terminal or personal computer and a printer.
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal
Computer
A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected
to the system RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular
phone jack (PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy
connection.
The terminal or computer connection cable must have an
RJ-12 type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM
(use P/N 74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops,
or P/N 74-100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal
computers). The connector at the terminal end must be of
the type required by the terminal device. Route the con-
nection cable to the RS-232 modular plug labelled PC port
jack until it snaps into place. The terminal or computer
must be located in the same room as the Central Control
Panel.
The parameters for and connections to the RS-232 PC
port are as follows:
Parameters:
9600 Baud
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
Note: These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.
Pin and Function:
1 TX
2 Signal Ground
3 RTS
4 CTS
5 N/C
6 RX
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer
The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised con-
nection. The installer must enable the printer port for op-
eration. The enabling or disabling of the printer port would
be done by accessing the first or second level menu.
A connection cable is all that is needed to connect a serial
printer to the RS-232 printer port of the CCM. The follow-
ing diagram represents the cable.
CCM PIN PRINTER
TX 1. RX (receive data)
Sig. Gnd. 2. Sig. Gnd.
RTS 3.
CTS* 4. DTR*
N/C 5.
RX 6.
* Note: +8 to +12 Vdc signal needed for supervision if us-
ing a graphic annunciator.
JK2
PRINT
PORT
Pin 6 Pin 1
Figure 7-16. CCM Printer Port
A-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX A
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT
The PEGAsys fire alarm/suppression control system re-
quires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch cir-
cuit (120 or 240 Vac), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM.
This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the
main power feed of the protected premises. No other equip-
ment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit.
The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any
Table A-1. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 Vac)
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device
Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9
Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 1.9 =
Sum column for AC Branch
Current required
= Amps
Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC
requirement by 1.9 Amps (max.)
Table A-2. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 Vac)
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device
Control Panel 1 X 0.95 = 0.95
Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 0.95 =
Sum column for AC Branch
Current required
= Amps
Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC
requirement by 0.95 Amps (max.)
disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/
suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies
are installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be
fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this
circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Elec-
tric Code, NFPA-72, as well as applicable local codes. Use
a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-V insulation for this
branch circuit.
A-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER
REQUIREMENTS
The control panel provides regulated power for operating
external devices, system operation, and standby battery
charging. The power for operating external devices is ex-
pandable. When using additional main power supplies in
expansion cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its
loading in the same way as the primary power supply in
the main cabinet.
Note: Use Table A-3 (standby or non-alarm) to determine
main system power supply and any installed aux-
iliary power module standby current requirements.
Table A-3. Standby Power Requirements (24 Vdc)
e c i v e D / e l u d o M
t n e r r u C y b d n a t S
) s p m A (
m e t s y S / e l u d o M
y b d n a t S m u m i x a M
) s p m A ( t n e r r u C
e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C 0 7 0 . 0 X 1 = 0 7 0 . 0
e l u d o m X T X R 5 3 0 . 0 X =
r o t i n o M y l p p u s r e w o P 0 6 0 . 0 X =
) 2 d n a 1 s e t o N e e S ( A 5 . 1 x a M , 1 t u p t u O y r a i l i x u A X =
) 2 d n a 1 s e t o N e e S ( A 5 . 1 x a M , 2 t u p t u O y r a i l i x u A X =
d r a o B r e h t o M p o o L - i t l u M 5 3 0 . 0 X =
e l u d o M t u p t u O e l b i d u A l a n g i S 5 2 0 . 0 X =
e l u d o M t u p t u O y a l e R 0 1 0 . 0 X =
e l u d o M t u p t u O e i T y t i C 0 3 0 . 0 X =
e l u d o M t u p t u O e s a e l e R t n e g A 5 6 0 . 0 X =
S E C I V E D D L E I F
r o t c e t e D n o i t a z i n o I 0 0 4 0 0 0 . 0 X =
r o t c e t e D c i r t c e l e o t o h P 5 0 4 0 0 0 . 0 X =
t u p n I t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A 0 1 3 0 0 0 . 0 X =
t u p t u O t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A 0 3 3 0 0 0 . 0 X =
s r o t a l o s I p o o L 1 0 0 . 0 X =
r o f n m u l o C m u S
d a o L y b d n a t S
) 2 s e t o N (
= s p m A
Note:
1. Auxiliary Outputs must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply.
2. Use of auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the
system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.
A-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-3 SYSTEM ALARM POWER
REQUIREMENTS
Note: Use Table A-4 (Alarm ) to determine alarm current
requirements for main system power supply and
auxiliary power supply combination (if used). When
Table A-4. Alarm Power Requirements (24 Vdc)
Module/Device Alarm Current (Amps) Module/System
Maximum Alarm
Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.210 X 1 = 0.210
CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1) X
RXTX Module 0.035 X =
Power Supply Monitor 0.060 X =
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =
Multi-Loop Mother Board .035 X =
Signal Audible Output Module 0.135 X =
Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3) X =
Relay Output Module 0.075 X =
City Tie Output Module 0.080 X =
Agent Release Output Module 0.150 X =
Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See Note 5) X =
Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note 4) X =
FIELD DEVICES
Ionization Detector 0.000440 X =
Photoelectric Detector 0.000445 X =
Addressable Contact Input 0.000380 X =
Addressable Zone Monitor 0.000400 X =
Addressable Contact Output 0.000350 X =
Loop Isolators (Active) 0.007 X =
PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD 0.050 X =
Sum Column for
Alarm Load
= Amps
Note:
1. CCM Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices. Each signal
circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use.
2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply.
3. Each signal output module's alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. There are a total
of four (4) signal circuits per module.
4. Each agent release module contains three signaling circuits per module, which must be evaluated for loading.
Each signal circuit will provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use.
5. With constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentary
solenoids are negligible in their current draws and should not be added into the calculation.
using additional main power supplies in expansion
cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its
own loading in the same way as the primary power
supply in the main cabinet.
A-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE
REQUIRED
Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at
the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the
control panel. There is a maximum battery size which the
system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of
charging. Select batteries which meet or exceed the total
amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable
range of the system battery charger output, which is 12 to
99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4,
complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) ca-
pacity necessary for the power supply.
Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required
Total Standby Load
(From Table A-3)
( )
X
Required Standby Time
(4, 24, 60 or 90) hours
( )
=
Total Alarm Load
(From Table A-4)
( )
X
Required Alarm Time
(5 min. enter 0.084)
(10 Min. enter 0.167)
( )
=
Total Amp Hours Required
(Sum of above)
=
(Derating Factor) X 0.1 =
Total AH Required
(Original AH required + Derating Factor)
=
Note:
1. Main system enclosure can house up to two (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module
is added to the system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used.
2. NFPA 722002 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by
five minutes alarm activation.
3. NFPA 722002 Auxiliary or Remote Station requires 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm
activation.
4. NFPA 722002 allows four hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven genera-
tor.
5. NFPA 2001 requires 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.
6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of
alarm activation.
A-5 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY
The system is capable of charging batteries of various ca-
pacities up to 99 AH; refer to Table A-6 for details concern-
ing battery capacities and charging capabilities.
Table A-6. Battery Capacities
) s r u o H p u k c a B ( y r e t t a B
t n e r r u C y b d n a t S e l b a l i a v A m u m i x a M
s p m A
) y l p p u S r e w o P e n O r o F (
t n e r r u C y b d n a t S e l b a l i a v A m u m i x a M
s p m A
) y l p p u S r e w o P o w T r o F (
) s r u o h 4 ( H A 2 1 5 . 2
) s r u o h 4 ( H A 7 1 6 . 3
) s r u o h 4 ( H A 3 3 A / N 1 . 7
) s r u o h 4 2 ( H A 3 3 2 . 1
) s r u o h 4 2 ( H A 0 6 1 y l p p u S r e w o P 1 r o f d e w o l l A t o N 0 . 6
) s r u o h 4 2 ( H A 6 6 9 . 0
) s r u o h 0 6 ( H A 9 9 4 . 1
) s r u o h 0 6 ( H A 9 9 9 . 0
) s r u o h 0 9 ( H A 0 6 1 y l p p u S r e w o P 1 r o f d e w o l l A t o N 6 . 1
A-5.1 Power Requirement Example
The following power calculations will be based on a the
system configuration listed below:
Central Control Panel (CCP) with
Field Devices:
Central Control Module
Ten (10) Ionization Detectors
Two (2) RX/TX Modules
Twenty (20) Photoelectric Detectors
One (1) Power Supply Module
Ten (10) Heat Detectors
One (1) Multi-Loop Motherboard
Six (6) Addressable Contact Input Devices
Two (2) Signal Output Modules, with signal appliances
totaling .800A on each
Four (4) Addressable Contact Output Devices
One (1) Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of the
CCM
One (1) Output Relay Module
One (1) Agent Release Output Module, has a momen-
tary control head on the releasing circuit and signaling
appliances totalling 0.5 A.
A-5.2 AC Branch Current Calculation Example
This example is based on the system specified in the pre-
vious paragraph. This system current calculation is for a
120 Vac main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional
information.
Table A-7. AC Branch Current Calculation Example
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Current Draw
(Amps)
Total Current
per Device
Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9
Auxiliary Power
Supply
0 X 1.9 = 0
Sum column for
AC Branch
Current
required
= 1.9 Amps
A-6 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-5.3 Main Power Supply Loading Examples
This example is based on the same system as above. Re-
fer to Paragraph A-2 for additional information.
Table A-8. Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation
Module/Device
Standby Current
(Amps)
Module/System
Maximum Standby
Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.070 X 1 = 0.070
RX/TX module 0.035 X 2 = 0.070
Power supply Monitor 0.060 X 1 = 0.060
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A X =
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A X =
Multi-Loop Mother Board 0.035 X 1 = 0.035
Signal Audible Output Module 0.025 X 2 = 0.050
Relay Output Module 0.010 X 1 = 0.010
City Tie Output Module 0.030 X =
Agent Release Output Module 0.065 X 1 = 0.065
FIELD DEVICES
Ionization Detector 0.000400 X 10 = 0.004
Photoelectric Detector 0.000400 X 20 = 0.008
Heat Detector 0.000400 10 0.004
Addressable Contact Input 0.000310 X 6 = 0.0024
Addressable Contact Output 0.000330 X 4 = 0.0016
Loop Isolators 0.001 X =
Sum Column for
Standby Load
= 0.380 Amps
A-7 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table A-9. Alarm Power Requirement Calculation
e c i v e D / e l u d o M ) s p m A ( t n e r r u C m r a l A m e t s y S / e l u d o M
m r a l A m u m i x a M
) s p m A ( t n e r r u C
e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C 0 1 2 . 0 X 1 = 0 1 2 . 0
t u p t u O 2 0 P M d n a 1 0 P M M C C 0 0 1 . 0 X 1 = 0 0 1 . 0
e l u d o M X T / X R 5 3 0 . 0 X 2 = 0 7 0 . 0
r o t i n o M y l p p u S r e w o P 0 6 0 . 0 X 1 = 0 6 0 . 0
A 5 . 1 x a M , 1 t u p t u O y r a i l i x u A 0 X =
A 5 . 1 x a M , 2 t u p t u O y r a i l i x u A 0 X =
d r a o B r e h t o M p o o L - i t l u M 5 3 0 . 0 X 1 = 5 3 0 . 0
e l u d o M t u p t u O e l b i d u A l a n g i S 5 3 1 . 0 X 2 = 0 7 2 . 0
s t u p t u O e l u d o M l a n g i S 0 0 8 . 0 X l a t o t = 0 0 8 . 0
e l u d o M t u p t u O y a l e R 5 7 0 . 0 X 1 = 5 7 0 . 0
e l u d o M t u p t u O e i T y t i C 0 8 0 . 0 X =
e l u d o M e s a e l e R t n e g A 0 5 1 . 0 X 1 = 0 5 1 . 0
s t i u c r i C t u p t u O e s a e l e R t n e g A
y r a t n e m o m g n i s U 0
e c i v e d
X 1 = 0
t i u c r i C l a n g i S e l u d o M e s a e l e R t n e g A 0 0 5 . X 1 = 0 0 5 . 0
S E C I V E D D L E I F X =
r o t c e t e D n o i t a z i n o I 0 4 4 0 0 0 . 0 X 0 1 = 4 4 0 0 . 0
r o t c e t e D c i r t c e l e o t o h P 5 4 4 0 0 0 . 0 X 0 2 = 8 8 0 0 . 0
r o t c e t e D t a e H 0 4 4 0 0 0 . 0 X 0 1 = 4 4 0 0 . 0
t u p n I t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A 0 8 3 0 0 0 . 0 X 6 = 6 2 0 0 . 0
t u p t u O t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A 0 0 4 0 0 0 . 0 X 4 = 8 1 0 0 . 0
) e v i t c A ( s r o t a l o s I p o o L 7 0 0 . 0 X =
m r a l A r o f n m u l o C m u S
d a o L
= s p m A 2 9 2 . 2
A-8 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-5.4 Battery Size Requirement Calculation
Example
This example is based on the same system as above. Re-
fer to Paragraph A-4 for additional information.
Table A-10. Battery Size Requirement Calculation
Total from Standby Power Requirement
Calculation
(0.380)
X
Required Standby Time
(4, 24, 60 or 90) hours
(24)
= 9.12
Total from Alarm Power Requirement
Calculation
(2.292)
X
Required Alarm Time
(5 min. enter 0.084)
(10 Min. enter 0.167) (0.084)
= 0.1925
Total of both sums equals Amp Hours
Required
(Sum of Above)
= 9.312
(Derating factor) X 0.1 0.9312
Total AH Required
(Original total AH required + Derating
Factor)
= 10.24
Example Results: The results of the prior calculations
are as follows:
Current requirement of the 120 Vac Main Feed is
1.9 Amps.
System Power Requirement when in Standby is
0.380 Amps.
System Power Requirements when in Alarm is
2.292 Amps.
Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 AH. Select 12
AH batteries.
B-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM EXPANSION
B-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion
in the number of RX/TX loops, output modules and sys-
tem output power. The system will support up to sixteen
(16) output modules for a single-loop system and twenty-
three (23) output modules for a multi-loop system, with a
maximum of eight (8) of any one type of module. The sys-
tem power supply monitor module can supervise two (2)
power supply units (4 Amps each for a total of eight [8]
Amps per module), which allows for up to 64 Amps of 24
Vdc power. The following diagrams will demonstrate the
available ways of expanding the system.
Figure B-1 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system (P/N
76-100000-501). This includes the Central Control Mod-
ule (CCM), Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power
Supply/Charger assembly and the system enclosure. The
basic system can be expanded as shown in the following
paragraphs.
06-129562-001
NO
NC
RS485 A
B
CCM
M O THERBD
SYSTEM
PO WER
2 4V R E T
24V
R E T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
BAT +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
DCIN2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
24 V L S H R
R E T
SHR
TP4
TP 3
DS1
S3
TB9
TB8
R
R
2
1
1
2
S1
A S HLA N D, M A 01 721
KID DE-F ENW AL, IN C.
RET
TBL RELA Y
TBL RELA Y
W2
W3
W4
F1 W1
S2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Figure B-1. Single Loop
Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with
the optional output motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) in-
stalled. The output motherboard provides the system with
mechanical and electrical interfaces for up to eight (8) out-
put modules of any style. To install the output modules,
insert them into the desired motherboard slot and fasten
to the metal bracket with the two (2) provided screws.
The PEGAsys ML (multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600)
looks much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the
exception of the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017-
001) in the place of the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007-
001). The multi-loop motherboard has the ability to connect
up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers, for a maximum of
2040 intelligent addressable points per system.
06-129562-001
NO
NC
R S48 5 A
B
C CM
MOTH ERBD
SYSTEM
POWER
24 V R E T
2 4V
R E T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
BA T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
DCIN2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
24 V L S H R
R E T
SHR
TP4
TP3
DS1
S3
TB9
TB8
R
R
2
1
1
2
S1
A S HL A ND, MA 0 17 2 1
KID DE-F ENW AL,IN C.
RET
TBL R ELA Y
TBL R ELA Y
W2
W3
W4
F1 W1
S2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard
Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary
power module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxil-
iary power supply module provides an additional 4 Amps
of 24 Vdc power for a total of 8 Amps for system use. The
unit would be installed if the system required more than
the base system's 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power. When the
auxiliary module is installed, the system batteries are
moved to a battery cabinet (P/N 76-100010-001). The cabi-
net is a UL Listed battery enclosure for use with the
PEGAsys.
Figure B-3 could also be a multi-loop system with the in-
clusion of the multi-loop motherboard and additional
RX/TX loop controllers.
B-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
06-129562-001
NO
NC
RS485 A
B
CCM
M OTHERBD
SYSTEM
PO WER
24 V R E T
24 V
R E T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
BA T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
DCIN2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
2 4 V L S H R
R E T
SHR
TP4
TP3
DS1
S3
TB9
TB8
R
R
2
1
1
2
S1
A S H LA N D, M A 017 21
KID DE-F ENW AL,IN C.
RET
TBL RELA Y
TBL RELA Y
W2
W3
W4
F1 W1
S2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module
Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys sys-
tem which contains two (2) motherboard assemblies, three
(3) complete power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 Vdc
power) and up to sixteen (16) total possible output mod-
ules. The communications bus interconnections between
the two motherboards are made by using six (6) conduc-
tors from the bus terminal block on the motherboard in the
main enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on
the motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connec-
tion allows complete supervision by the CCM in the main
enclosure of all output modules installed on the second
motherboard. The 24 Vdc power for the motherboard (in
the expansion enclosure) is derived from one of the power
supply assemblies installed within that enclosure and is
connected by a two-wire connection.
The power supplies need to be tied to the communica-
tions bus for supervision purposes. In the above example,
the installer would use a two-conductor cable to connect
the communications bus from the motherboard assembly
to the power supply. The second power supply could then
be daisy-chained to the first to complete the communica-
ti ons connecti ons. The mai n power suppl y and
motherboard in the first enclosure must be configured for
in-line RS-485 bus supervision by removing jumpers W4
and JP1, respectively. Only one of the three bus commu-
nication components (i.e., power supply monitor modules
and motherboard) in the expansion enclosure can have its
terminating jumper installed. The other two must be con-
figured for inline RS-485 bus supervision.
Auxiliary power supplies within the expansion enclosure
can share a set of batteries, or they can individually sup-
port their own set of batteries.
06-129562-001
NO
NC
R S4 85 A
B
C C M
MOTH E RB D
SY S TE MP OWE R
2 4V RET 2 4V RET
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
B A T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
D C IN 2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
24 V L SHR RET
SHR
T P 4
T P 3
DS1
S3
TB 9
T B 8
R
R
21
12
S1
A S H LA N D ,M A 0 172 1
K ID D E -F E N W A L,I N C .
RET
TB L R EL A Y
TB L R EL A Y
W2 W3
W4
F1 W1
S2
06 -12 9 56 2 -0 01
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4 V RET 2 4V 2 4 V RET RET 2 4 V RET BAT
+ -
AUX 1 AUX 2
DC IN 2
C
DCIN 1
ACOUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S2
06 -12 9 56 2-0 01
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4V RET 2 4 V 2 4V RET RET 2 4V RET BAT
+ -
AUX1 AUX 2
DC IN 2
C
DCIN 1
ACOUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System
Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is
capable of having eight (8) output modules of various types
and a maximum of 24 Vdc power at 40 Amps. This DC
power is hardwired into signal and release modules whose
loading would otherwise cause more than 8 Amps of 24
Vdc current to be drawn from the motherboard during ac-
tivation.
The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide
individual modules with their own power source. Refer to
the particular module installation diagram in Chapter 7 and
Appendix A for power-supply expansion guidelines.
Note: One main power supply/charger assembly can be
used to charge a common set of batteries. All other
power supply/charger assemblies can be con-
nected to the common set of batteries in parallel
for backup DC power only. The charging circuit on
the additional power supply/charger assemblies
will have to be disabled by removing jumper W1.
Be careful not to exceed the maximum charging
capacity of the main power supply.
B-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Figure B-6. Expanded System for up to 16 Output Modules and 7 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies
06-129562-001
NO
NC
R S 485 A
B
C C M
MOT H E R B D
S Y S T E M P OWE R
2 4V RE T 24 V RE T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
B A T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
D CIN 2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
24 V L S HR RE T
SHR
T P 4
T P 3
DS1
S3
T B 9
T B 8
R
R
2
1
1
2
S1
A S H L A N D , M A 0 1 7 2 1
K ID D E -F E N W A L, IN C .
RET
T B L R E LA Y
T B L R E LA Y
W2
W3
W4
F 1 W1
S2
0 6 -1 2 9 5 6 2 -0 0 1
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4 V RET 2 4 V 2 4 V RET RET 2 4 V RET BAT
+ -
A UX 1A UX 2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN 1
A C OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6 -1 2 9 5 6 2 - 0 0 1
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4 V RET 2 4 V 2 4 V RET RET 2 4 V RET BAT
+ -
A UX 1A UX 2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN 1
A C OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6- 1 29 56 2 -0 01
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24 V RET 2 4V 24 V RET RET 24 V RET BAT
+ -
A UX 1A UX 2
DC IN 2
C
DCI N1
A COUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6- 1 29 56 2 -0 01
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24 V RET 2 4V 24 V RET RET 24 V RET BAT
+ -
A UX1 A UX2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN 1
A C OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6 -1 29 56 2 -0 01
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24 V RET 2 4 V 24 V RET RET 24 V RET BAT
+ -
A UX1 A UX2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN 1
A C OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6 -1 29 5 62 -0 0 1
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4V RET 2 4 V 2 4V RET RET 2 4V RET BAT
+ -
A UX1 A UX2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN 1
A C OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
SHR TP4 TP3
DS 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
06- 129562- 001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R E T 24V 24V R E T R E T 24V R E T BAT
+ -
AUX1 AUX2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN1
AC OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N AC IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R E T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06- 129562- 001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R E T 24V 24V R E T R E T 24V R E T BAT
+ -
AUX1 AUX2
DC IN 2
C
DCIN 1
ACOUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R E T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06- 129562- 001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R E T 24V 24V R E T R E T 24V R E T BAT
+ -
AUX1 AUX2
DC IN 2
C
DC IN1
AC OUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N AC IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R E T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06- 129562- 001
NO NC
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V R E T 24V 24V R E T R E T 24V R E T BAT
+ -
AUX1 AUX2
DC IN 2
C
DCI N1
ACOUT
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N ACIN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S H R TP4 TP3
DS1
S3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
R E T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W4
F1
W1
S2
06-129562-001
NO
NC
RS 485 A
B
CCM
MOTHE RB D
S Y S TE MP OW E R
2 4 V R E T 2 4 V R E T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
B A T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
DCIN2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
2 4 V L S H R R E T
SHR
TP 4
TP 3
DS1
S3
TB 9
TB 8
R
R
21
12
S1
A S H LA N D ,MA 01721
K IDDE -FE NW A L,INC.
RET
TB L RE LA Y
TB L RE LA Y
W 2W 3
W4
F1 W 1
S2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Figure B-5. Expanded System for up to 8 Output
Modules and 5 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies
Figure B-6 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which
could have sixteen (16) output modules and 56 Amps of
24 Vdc power. Figure B-6 also displays the flexibility to
bring all four power supply assemblies in the second ex-
pansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In this arrange-
ment, one of the four power supplies charges the batteries,
and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Each
power supply must have two of its own conductors con-
nected directly to the battery set to meet code require-
ments. The three non-charging power supplies must have
Jumper W1 removed to disable their charging circuits. Re-
fer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for more details on power
expansion.
Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which
could have up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers and nine
(9) output modules installed in the two motherboards. The
system also has a maximum 24 Vdc power of 24 Amps,
as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appen-
dix A for power supply expansion guidelines.
B-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Figure B-7. Expanded ML System for 8 RX/TX and 9 Output Modules
06-129562-001
NO
NC
R S 4 8 5 A
B
C C M
M O T H E RB D
S Y S T E M P O WE R
2 4V R E T
24 V R E T
24V
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RET
B A T +
-
AUX 1 AUX 2
D C IN 2
C
DC IN 1 AC OUT
N 1 L 2 N G L N
AC IN
2 4 V L S H R
R E T
SHR
T P 4
T P 3
DS1
S3
T B 9
T B 8
R
R
2
1
1
2
S1
ASHL AND, MA 0 1 72 1
K ID D E -F E N W A L , IN C .
RET
T B L R E L A Y
T B L R E L A Y
W2
W3
W4
F 1 W1
S2
0 6 -1 2 9 5 6 2 - 0 0 1
N O N C
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4 V RE T 2 4 V 2 4 V RE T RE T 2 4 V RE T BAT
+ -
A U X 1
A U X 2
DC IN 2
C
D C IN 1
A C OU T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S HR TP4 TP3
D S 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RE T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
0 6 - 1 2 9 5 6 2 -0 0 1
N O N C
RS485
A B
CCM MOTHER BD
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
2 4 V RE T 2 4V 2 4 V RE T RE T 2 4 V RE T BAT
+ -
A U X 1
A U X 2
DC IN 2
C
D C IN 1
A C OU T
N 1 L
2 N
G
L
N A C IN
24V
L
SHR
RET
S HR TP4 TP3
D S 1
S 3
TB9 TB8
R R
2 1 1 2
S 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RE T
TBL RELAY TBL RELAY W2 W3
W 4
F1
W1
S 2
Kidde
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SILENCE
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
C-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX C
RELEASING APPLICATIONS
C-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release, pre-
action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications.
When used with UL Listed, compatible actuating and initi-
ating devices, the PEGAsys system meets the require-
ments of the following standards:
NFPA 12 CO
2
Extinguishing Systems
(High Pressure)
NFPA 12A HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems
NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water
Spray Systems
NFPA 17 Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 2001 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
C-2 PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys system can support up to nine (9) indepen-
dently controlled releasing outputs (AR1-AR8 and MP1),
which are used to control releasing functions. AR1-AR8
are the agent release I/O modules which are inserted into
the I/O motherboard. MP1 is the CCM releasing output
Table C-1. Abort Styles
Note: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the protected
area. Maximum allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL 864. The abort input is not intended to be used
for a service disconnect.
e p y T t r o b A n o i t p i r c s e D
s e i r o t a r o b a L r e t i r w r e d n U
) 4 6 8 L U h t i w s e i l p m o C ( ) L U (
l i t n u k r a m d n o c e s 0 1 t a s p o t s d n a , n o i t a v i t c a t r o b a n o p u n w o d t n u o c o t s e u n i t n o c r e m i t y a l e D
0 1 t a g n i t r a t s n w o d t n u o c e h t s e m u s e r r e m i t , h c t i w s t r o b a f o e s a e l e r n o p U . h c t i w s t r o b a f o e s a e l e r
. s d n o c e s
s r e r u s n I k s i R l a i r t s u d n I
) L U - n o N ( ) I R I (
y l n o l l i w t r o b a e h t t a h t n o i t p e c x e y l n o e h t h t i w , t r o b a e p y t - L U e h t o t r e n n a m r a l i m i s n i s n o i t c n u F
. m r a l a d n o c e s e h t f o t p i e c e r e h t o t r o i r p d l e h f i n o i t c n u f
y t i C k r o Y w e N
) L U - n o N (
, y a l e d d e t c e l e s e h t o t r e m i t y a l e d e h t s e g n a h c , s t s i x e m r a l a n a e c n o , h c t i w s t r o b a e h t f o n o i t a r e p O
f o e s a e l e R . d l e h s i h c t i w s t r o b a e h t s a g n o l s a t r a t s t o n l l i w r e m i t e h T . s d n o c e s 0 9 l a n o i t i d d a n a s u l p
. y a l e d l a n o i t i d d a s d n o c e s 0 9 e h t s u l p , e u l a v l a i t i n i e h t m o r f n w o d t n u o c e h t s e u n i t n o c h c t i w s t r o b a e h t
n o i t c i d s i r u J l a c o L
) L U - n o N (
. e u l a v l a n i g i r o s t i o t r e m i t e h t s e r o t s e r h c t i w s t r o b a e h t f o n o i t a r e p o , d e t r a t s s a h r e m i t y a l e d e h t e c n O
h c t i w s t r o b a e h t f o e s a e l e R . d l e h s i h c t i w s t r o b a e h t s a g n o l s a t r a t s t o n l l i w r e m i t y a l e d e h T
. n w o d t n u o c e h t s e u n i t n o c
which is optionally programmable to be a signal release
output. The PCS program is used to program the system
for all functions, including releasing. For complete details,
refer to the PCS manual. The following features are sup-
ported for releasing functions.
C-3 ABORT
The abort function is a feature which manually stops a dis-
charge time delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of
aborts, as listed in Table C-1.
C-4 DELAY
The time-delay period is an installer programmable value
which begins to count down after the automatic release
criterion has be attained for a particular protected area.
The time-delay can be programmed for activation after one
or two alarm occurrences.
C-5 SOAK
The soak function is used to automatically shut off the re-
leasing solenoid at a pre-determined time after the mapped
inputs activate it. It may be programmed as a 10-minute or
15-minute soak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA
16 applications only.
C-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
C-6 SPECIAL MODULE TYPES
The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have
special releasing functions. These devices are:
C-6.1 Abort Switch
The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact
monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an
abort input with a selected abort style, as explained in Table
C-1. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a
Listed abort station, such as the Kidde Suppression Sys-
Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Abort Switch
Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision. Failure to install this
resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.
Addressable Contact Monitor
P/N 70-407008-001
PUSH / HOLD
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT
.
10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003
P/N 87875201
M
O
D
E
L
A
I,
N
/O
IN
S
T
R
U
C
T
IO
N
S
S
E
E
IN
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
IO
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
8
-
0
0
1
S
m
a
r
t
O
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
IC
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
ID
D
E
-
F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
IN
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
IN
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0

F
7654321
0
6
-
2
3
5
5
7
8
-
0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
8
A
S W
B
S W
( + )
L E D
( - )
L E D
Remote LED
(Optional)
PC Line
In
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
PC Line
Out
A
L
L
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
tem Abort switch (P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the
interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and
the abort station switch.
C-6.2 Manual Release Switch
The manual release switch is an addressable contact moni-
tor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as a manual
release input. The addressable contact monitor is con-
nected to a Listed manual release station such as the Kidde
Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X).
Figure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable
contact monitor and the manual release switch.
Figure C-2. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Manual Release Switch
Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual pull station contacts for supervision. Failure to install
this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.
PUSH
PULL
R
P/N 84-100007-00X Addressable Contact Monitor
P/N 70-407008-001
.
10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003
M
O
D
E
L
A
I,
N
/O
IN
S
T
R
U
C
T
IO
N
S
S
E
E
IN
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
IO
N
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
8
-
0
0
1
S
m
a
r
t
O
n
e
T
M
F
O
R
S
E
R
V
IC
E
S
E
N
D
T
O
:
K
ID
D
E
-
F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
4
0
0
M
A
IN
S
T
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
D
A
T
E
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
:
M
A
X
.
IN
S
T
A
L
L
.
T
E
M
P
.
1
2
0

F
7654321
0
6
-
2
3
5
5
7
8
-
0
0
1
P C P C P C P C
( + ) ( - ) ( + ) ( - )
8
A
S W
B
S W
( + )
L E D
( - )
L E D
Remote LED
(Optional)
PC Line
In
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
PC Line
Out
A
L
L
T
E
R
M
IN
A
L
S
A
R
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
IM
IT
E
D
FIRE
ALARM
FIRE
ALARM
C-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
C-7 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS
C-7.1 CCM Release Output Wiring
The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM
(MP01, Terminal TB4, sounder 1 "A" leg), that is defaulted
as a release output. See Appendix I and the PCS User's
Manual for details on the configuration of this output.
An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in
Figure C-3. For wiring details, see the CCM wiring diagram
in Appendix I.
SOUNDER 1
R
E
P
1
A B
Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics
C-7.2 Release Module Output Wiring
The agent release module that the PEGAsys system uses
to provide the release function offers one release output
capable of powering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer
to Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on
configuration of the release outputs, along with all other
system parameters.
All wiring from the agent release module to the release de-
vice is fully supervised, including the actual device in the
circuit. An example of the releasing circuit wiring is pro-
vided in Figure C-4. For all wiring detail, see Appendix I. For
a list of Approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in this manual.
Single Solenoid
Two Solenoid
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics
C-8 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and super-
vise pre-action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for
protection of facilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent
release output modules (AR1-AR8) can be programmed
for use with most popular sprinkler solenoids.
For sprinkler applications the addressable input module
(P/N 70-407008-00x) can be used to monitor and super-
vise any of the following sprinkler type inputs, as required,
for each particular application. Inputs could be air pres-
sure, waterflow, water level (tank), pump running, etc. Refer
to Chapter 2 for details on programming the addressable
input device for various reporting styles.
C-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
D-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX D
Space Reserved for Future Use.
D-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
E-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX E
FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS
FOR PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
E-1 GENERAL INFORMATION
PEGAsys system installation applications that require
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval of pre-action and deluge
sprinkler systems must conform to the following guidelines:
SmartOne

Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252,

when used, must be installed at 20 ft. spacings. The
pre-alarm and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:
Pre-Alarm80to 155F
Alarm135to 155F
Initiating Circuits (RX/TX-PC line) must be configured
for Style 6 wiring. See Appendix I for complete RX/TX
PC line wiring instructions.
Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of
alarm operation. Refer to Appendix A.
Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or agent
release module AR1-AR8. Each output is required to
be configured for solenoid activation. The solenoid out-
put on-time period should be set to either 90 seconds
or on until reset using the PCS program.
E-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
F-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX F
GLOSSARY
s s e r d d A
d n a r e b m u n p o o l X T / X R e h t s i t i g i d t s 1 . e c i v e d t r a m s a f o r e b m u n e c i v e d r o e c n e u q e s e h t g n i t a c i d n i e d o c t i g i d r u o f A
. r e b m u n e c i v e d e h t e r a s t i g i d e e r h t g n i n i a m e r e h t
e c i v e D e l b a s s e r d d A
l a r t n e C a o t k n u r t x e l p i t l u m a a i v e t a t s d n a n o i t a c o l s t i e t a c i n u m m o c y l l a c i t a m o t u a o t y t i l i b a p a c e h t h t i w e c i v e d A
. l e n a P l o r t n o C
t c a t n o C e l b a s s e r d d A
) D I C A ( e c i v e D
: e l b a l i a v a e r a s e p y t e c i v e d o w T . e c i v e d g n i t a i t i n i e p y t - t c a t n o c , d e r e w o p n u n a h t i w s e c a f r e t n i t a h t e l u d o m r o t i n o M
. d e s o l C y l l a m r o N d n a n e p O y l l a m r o N
k s a T e v i t a r t s i n i m d A . l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t f o s n o i t c n u f g n i p e e k e s u o h r e h t o d n a s u t a t s , s t s i l , s t r o p e R
n o i t a c i f i r e V m r a l A
d o i r e p y a l e d e h t g n i r u d l a n g i s n o i t a m r i f n o c a r o f t i a w o t m e t s y s e h t s e s u a c h c i h w y a l e d e m i t d e m m a r g o r p e r p A
. n o i t i n i f e d 2 0 0 2 2 7 A P F N e h t s t e e M . s t u p t u o m r a l a d e m m a r g o r p e r p e h t g n i t a v i t c a e r o f e b
g o l a n A
a e b i r c s e d o t , e l p m a x e r o F . y t i t n a u q l a c i s y h p d n a e l b a i r a v s u o u n i t n o c a f o s n a e m y b n o i t a t n e s e r p e r o t g n i n i a t r e P
. c t e , . t f / % , e g a t l o v s a h c u s y t i t n a u q l a c i s y h p
e c i v e D t u p n I g o l a n A . e c i v e D t r a m S e e S
l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C
, y l p p u S r e w o P , ) X T / X R ( e l u d o M r e t t i m s n a r T / r e v i e c e R , ) M C C ( e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C s e s u o h t a h t e r u s o l c n e n A
. s e l u d o M t u p t u O d n a d r a o b r e h t o M l a n o i t p o
l o r t n o C l a r t n e C
) M C C ( e l u d o M
, y l b m e s s A y a l p s i D , t i n U g n i s s e c o r P l a r t n e C n i a m e h t s n i a t n o c t I . m e t s y s e h t f o t r a e h e h t s i e l u d o m s i h T
l a n g i s e l b a m m a r g o r p o w t , s t r o p l a i r e s C 2 3 2 - S R o w t , r e m i T g o D h c t a W , k c o l C e m i T - l a e R , y r o m e M e l b a m m a r g o r P
. s y a l e r C m r o F e e r h t d n a s t u p t u o
e c i v e D l a t i g i D . s U C R t u p t u O y a l e R r o t u p n I t c a t n o C a s a h c u s , s e t a t s e t e r c s i d o w t h t i w e c i v e d A
d e t u b i r t s i D
e c n e g i l l e t n I
, p o o l e h t n o n e d r u b n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h t s e c u d e r s i h T . e c i v e d d l r o w l a e r l a u t c a e h t o t d e t u b i r t s i d s i r e w o p g n i t u p m o C
. l e v e l e c i v e d e h t t a e d a m e r a s n o i s i c e d m r a l a e r P d n a m r a l A l l A . I F R d n a I M E o t y t i n u m m i r e t a e r g g n i d i v o r p s u h t
n o i t a s n e p m o C t f i r D
s e m i t 6 5 2 e u l a v r e b m a h c e k o m s n o i t c e t e d s t i s e r o t s d n a s e r u s a e m s r o t c e t e d n o i t a z i n o i r o c i r t c e l e o t o h p n i U P C e h T
d e r o t s s i e g a r e v a y l i a d e h T . s y a d 0 3 r o f e g a r e v a y l i a d e h t s e r o t s d n a s e u l a v s y a d h c a e s e g a r e v a U P C e h T . y a d r e p
e r a t a h t s e u l a v e h T . d l o s y a d 0 3 s i t a h t e g a r e v a e h t g n i p p o r d d n a e g a r e v a s y a d l a n i f e h t g n i d d a n o i h s a f g n i l l o r c s a n i
e h t f o m u s e h T . n o i t a r e p o y l i a d n i s e c n e i r e p x e r o t c e t e d e h t t a h t n o i t i d n o c l a t n e m n o r i v n e e u q i n u e h t t c e l f e r d e r o t s
s n o i t i d n o c l a t n e m n o r i v n e e u q i n u e h t r e d n u n o i t c e t e d e k o m s r o f t n i o p e c n e r e f e r a h s i l b a t s e o t d e s u s i s y a d 0 3 g n i l l o r c s
g n i c u d e r t u o h t i w s e c n e u l f n i l a t n e m n o r i v n e m o r f s m r a l a e s l a f s e c u d e r e r u t a e f s i h T . s e c n e i r e p x e r o t c e t e d e h t t a h t
. y t i v i t i s n e s
y l b m e s s A y a l p s i D
e h t l o r t n o c o t s e h c t i w s n o t t u b h s u p , y a l p s i d c i r e m u n a h p l a r e t c a r a h c 0 8 g n i t a c i d n i n a : s e d u l c n i y l b m e s s a y a l p s i d e h T
e h T . s u t a t s m e t s y s y a l p s i d o t s D E L g n i t a c i d n i d n a , m e t s y s s y s A G E P t i d n a M C C e h t n o d e t n u o m s i y l b m e s s a y a l p s i d
. e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t h t i w s e t a c i n u m m o c
l o r t n o C t u p t u O t n e v E
) C O E (
t i u s o t e l b i x e l f s i e g a u g n a l C O E e h T . s t u p t u o d e r i s e d e h t n i a t b o o t s t u p n i f o g n i n i b m o c s w o l l a g n i m m a r g o r p C O E e h T
. n o i t a c i l p p a n o i s s e r p p u s / m r a l a e r i f y n a t s o m
r e i f i t n e d I l a n r e t n I
) 5 5 2 I 1 0 0 I (
. ) 1 0 0 I = 4 0 0 1 + 1 0 0 1 , e l p m a x e r o f ( s t u p n i f o n o i t a n i b m o c a y f i t n e d i r o e m a n o t d e s u e r a t a h t s l o b m y S
d r a o b r e h t o M
l a c i p y T . s e l u d o m t u p t u o t h g i e r o f y t i c a p a c e h t s a h t a h t , l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l , y l b m e s s a l a n o i t p o n A
. e s a e l e R t n e g A d n a e l b i d u A l a n g i S , y a l e R e r a s e l u d o m t u p t u o
p o o L . C L S d e n i a h c - y s i a d A
s r o t a l o s I p o o L
A P F N o t s m r o f n o C . e n i l C P X T / X R e h t n o s n o i t i d n o c t r o h s e r i w o t e r i w t s n i a g a n o i t c e t o r p s e d i v o r p h c i h w e c i v e d A
. 0 . 7 e l y t S
e n i L p o r d i t l u M . t n i o p l a r t n e c a m o r f s e c i v e d l a r e v e s g n i t c e n n o c r e t n i t i u c r i c r o e n i L
x e l p i t l u M
) 2 7 - A P F N r e P (
o t s e c i v e d 5 5 2 s w o l l a s y s A G E P e h T . s e c i v e d e r o m r o e n o h t i w e t a c i n u m m o c o t s e r i w f o r i a p r o k n u r t e n o f o e s u e h T
. k n u r t e n o n o e t a c i n u m m o c
e l u d o M t u p t u O
n o i t a c i f i t o n e t a v i t c a o t , e r u s o l c n e l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l , s t i u c r i c l a n o i t n e v n o c f o y l b m e s s a n A
s e l u d o m l a c i p y T . s t n e m e r i u q e r l a n o i t a r e p o s ' m e t s y s e h t n i d e i f i c e p s s e c i v e d r e h t o r o s d i o n e l o s g n i s a e l e r , s e c n a i l p p a
. e l b i d u A l a n g i S d n a y a l e R e r a
F-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
s n o i t a c o L r e n w O
f o n o i t p i r c s e d c i r e m u n a h p l a r e t c a r a h c - 9 3 a e r o t s o t r e n w o e h t y b e l b a m m a r g o r p e r a t a h t s n o i t a c o l y r o m e M
. s t i u c r i c d n a s e l u d o m t u p t u o d n a s e c i v e d l o r t n o c d n a g n i t a i t i n i e h t f o n o i t a c o l e h t
e n i L C P . ) C L S ( t i u c r i C e n i L l a n g i S d e l l a c o s l A . e l u d o M X T / X R e h t m o r f g n i t a n i g i r o s e r i w n o i t a c i n u m m o c d n a r e w o P
e l u d o M t u p t u O y a l e R
. t n e m p i u q e y r a i l i x u a h t i w s e c a f r e t n i t a h t e r u s o l c n e l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l e l u d o M t u p t u O n A
y a l e R ) 8 ( t h g i e f o l a t o t A . s y a l e r c d V 4 2 p m A 2 T D P S e l b a m m a r g o r p l a u d i v i d n i r u o f s n i a t n o c e l u d o m h c a E
. s t i u c r i c ) 2 3 ( o w t - y t r i h t f o l a t o t a r o f m e t s y s e h t n i d e s u e b y a m s e l u d o M t u p t u O
U C R t u p t u O y a l e R
. n a f a s a h c u s e c i v e d a l o r t n o c o t t c a t n o c y a l e r a s e d i v o r p t a h t e c i v e d d l e i f t r a m s r o e l b a s s e r d d a n A
. x o b l a c i r t c e l e e r a u q s h c n i - 4 a n i s t n u o m y l l a c i p y T
) U C R ( t i n U l o r t n o C e t o m e R . e c i v e d d l e i f t r a m s r o e l b a s s e r d d a n A
e l u d o M X T / X R
l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l s i e l u d o m r e t t i m s n a r T / r e v i e c e R e h T
d n a e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n e e w t e b e c a f r e t n i n o i s s i m s n a r t a t a d a s a s n o i t c n u f d n a e r u s o l c n e l e n a P
. ) s U C R ( s t i n u l o r t n o c e t o m e r
e l u d o M t u p t u O e l b i d u A l a n g i S
r u o f r o Z e l y t S , A s s a l C o w t s e d i v o r p t a h t , e r u s o l c n e l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l , e l u d o m t u p t u o n A
t r o h s r o n e p o n a r o f d e s i v r e p u s e r a s t i u c r i c l l A . s t i u c r i c l a n g i s d e z i r a l o p p m A 2 , V 4 2 , Y e l y t S , B s s a l C
s y s A G E P e h t n i d e l l a t s n i e b y a m s t i u c r i c ) 2 3 ( o w t - y t r i h t h t i w s e l u d o m ) 8 ( t h g i e f o m u m i x a m A . n o i t i d n o c
. m e t s y s
r o t c e t e D e k o m S t r a m S
r i e h t n i h t i w s d n o c e s e n i n y r e v e l e v e l e k o m s e r u s a e m ) c i r t c e l e o t o h p r o n o i t a z i n o i ( s r o t c e t e d e k o m s t r a m S
s e r u s a e m t i e r e h w e t a t s t r e l a n a s r e t n e r o t c e t e d e h t e k o m s g n i t c e t e d y l l i a t i n i r e t f A . r e b m a h c g n i s n e s e k o m s
a s d n e s t i , s e l p m a s r u o f f o t u o e e r h t e k o m s s t c e t e d r o t c e t e d e h t f I . s d n o c e s o w t y r e v e n o i t a r t n e c n o c e k o m s
. l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t o t l a n g i s m r a l a r o m r a l a - e r p
e c i v e D t r a m S
e k a m o t r e w o p g n i t u p m o c e h t s a h y l l a n o i t i d d a t u b e c i v e d e l b a s s e r d d a n a f o s e r u t a e f e h t h t i w e c i v e d A
o s l A . r o t c e t e d e h t f o n o i t i d n o c d n a , a t a d l a t n e m n o r i v n e d n a n o i t a r b i l a c d e r o t s n o d e s a b s n o i s i c e d m r a l a
. s r o t c e t e d n o i t a z i n o i r o c i r t c e l e o t o h p e b d l u o w s e l p m a x E . s e u l a v g o l a n a s e v i e c e r d n a s t i m s n a r t e c i v e d e h t
e c i v e D m r a l A e r i F d r a d n a t S
e l b a s s e r d d a n a s e r i u q e r t I . k n u r t x e l p i t l u m e h t o t y l t c e r i d e i t o t y r a s s e c e n s c i n o r t c e l e e h t t u o h t i w e c i v e d A
t a e h d n a e k o m s l a n o i t n e v n o c , . e . i ( m e t s y s s y s A G E P e h t h t i w e c a f r e t n i o t e c i v e d t u p t u o e l b a s s e r d d a r o t u p n i
. ) s r o t c e t e d
e t a t S
U C R a s e t a t s e l b a m m a r g o r p d l e i f ) 8 ( t h g i e e r a e r e h T . s u t a t s s U C R n a s e i f i t n e d i t a h t y a l p s i d e h t n o e d o c A
d n a y r o s i v r e p u S , w o l F r e t a W , e s a e l e R l a u n a M , m r a l A l a u n a M , t r o b A , e l b u o r T , m r a l A : o t d e m m a r g o r p e b y a m
. l a m r o N
y l p p u S r e w o P m e t s y S
r e w o P e h t o t e g a t l o v C D e d i v o r p , s e i r e t t a b y b - d n a t S . r e w o p m e t s y s y r a d n o c e s d n a y r a m i r p s e d i v o r P
l e n a P l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i d e t a c o l e r a s e i r e t t a b y b - d n a t s e h T . e r u l i a f r e w o p C A n a f o t n e v e e h t n i y l p p u S
. e r u s o l c n e
P A T - T . n o i t a r u g i f n o c 4 e l y t S n i e l b a w o l l a y l n O . e n i L p o r d i t l u m e e S
y a l e R e l b u o r T . n o i t i d n o c e l b u o r t m e t s y s y n a g n i r u d s e t a r e p o h c i h w y a l e r e l b a m m a r g o r p - n o n A
e p y T
d n a e k o m S s e i f i t n e d i e g a s s e m e h T . g n i t r o p e r e c i v e d f o e p y t e h t s e i f i t n e d i t a h t y a l p s i d D C L n o e g a s s e m A
. s e c i v e d U C R t u p t u O d n a t u p n I d n a s r o t c e t e d t a e H
r e i f i t n e d I e l b a i r a V . ) 5 5 2 I - 1 0 0 I ( r e i f i t n e d I l a n r e t n I e e S
r e m i T g o D h c t a W e l u d o M
t i , y l l a m r o n g n i t a r e p o s i U P C e h t f I . U P C e l u d o M l o r t n o C l a r t n e C e h t n i y t i l a m r o n b a n a s e s n e s r e m i t s i h T
. e l b u o r t m e t s y s a s e t a c i d n i d n a t u o s e m i t t i , t e s e r t o n s i r e m i t e h t f I . r e m i t e h t s t e s e r y l l a c i d o i r e p
. t f / % . t o o f r e p n o i t a r u c s b o e k o m s f o t n e c r e P
G-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX G
DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation Meaning
232 RS-232-C
A.V. Alarm Verification
ACK Acknowledge
ADDR. Address
ALM Alarm
AOF Alarm Off
BAT. Battery
C.L. Combinational Logic
CD Contact Detector Error
CT City Tie
DISCON Disconnect
DISP Panel Display
DR Drift Error
EW EEPROM Write Error
EX External Trouble
INP Input
IT Illegal RCU Type
L9 Line + 9V Trouble
LEV. Level
LV Line Voltage Trouble
NA NOV RAM Access Error
NG No good
NR Not Registered
O.L. Owner Location
Abbreviation Meaning
OF Off
OK All Right
OP Open
OR Optional Relay
OUT Output
PC Power Communications Line
P.S. Power Supply
P.W. Password
POF Pre-alarm Off
PRE Pre-alarm
PRNT Printer
PROG Program
R.P. Remote Panel
RTC Real Time Control
RY Relay Output Module
SG Signal Output Module
SH Short
SPV Supervisory
TBL Trouble
TE RCU Test No Good
TOF Trouble Off
TST RCU Test
UK Unknown Device Connected
VOLT. Voltage
ZA Zone Alarm
G-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
H-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX H
WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR PEGASYS
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (RX/TX)
RECOMMENDED WIRE TYPES
For best results, use twisted, unshielded, low-capacitance, addressable-fire-alarm wire with a nominal wire-to-wire capaci-
tance of approximately 20 pf (i.e., picofarads, where 1 pf = 10
-6
f) per foot for the RX/TXs signaling-line circuit. Typical wire
types that meet these criteria are indicated below:
) G W A ( e z i S e r i W r e r u t c a f u n a M r e b m u N t r a P g n i t a R ) . t f / f p ( p a C
8 1 . p r o C e l b a C & e r i W s a l t A P T 1 - 1 - 8 1 - 8 2 2 L P F 5 . 2 1
e r i W n n e P t s e W 0 8 9 D L P F 0 . 6 1
e r i W n n e P t s e W B 0 8 9 0 6 P L P F 0 . 9 2
e l b a C n a m e l o C 1 8 1 8 9 L P F 0 . 9 1
e l b a C n a m e l o C 0 2 8 8 9 R L P F 0 . 6 2
. c n I , t n o m r e V f o d r o f f i l C M - L P F 1 B 8 1 P 1 L P F 0 . 5 1
n o i t a r o p r o C n a r t m o C 4 8 1 4 R L P F 0 . 0 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B J U 0 2 3 5 L P F 5 . 2 1
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B 1 7 5 9 R L P F 0 . 2 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B J U 0 2 3 6 P L P F 0 . 5 2
C C S B E 2 0 8 1 4 3 P L P F 0 . 5 2
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 0 5 0 4 L P F 0 . 5 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 1 3 4 4 R L P F 0 . 5 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 1 3 6 4 P L P F 0 . 6 1
6 1 . p r o C e l b a C & e r i W s a l t A P T 1 - 1 - 6 1 - 8 2 2 L P F 5 . 2 1
e r i W n n e P t s e W 0 9 9 D L P F 0 . 8 1
e l b a C n a m e l o C 1 6 1 8 9 L P F 0 . 0 2
e l b a C n a m e l o C 0 2 6 8 9 R L P F 0 . 7 2
. c n I , t n o m r e V f o d r o f f i l C M - L P F 1 B 6 1 P 1 L P F 0 . 9 1
n o i t a r o p r o C n a r t m o C 4 3 2 4 R L P F 0 . 0 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B J U 0 2 2 5 L P F 5 . 3 1
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B 2 7 5 9 R L P F 0 . 9 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B J U 0 2 2 6 P L P F 0 . 7 2
C C S B E 2 0 6 1 4 3 P L P F 0 . 8 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 1 5 0 4 L P F 0 . 7 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 2 3 4 4 R L P F 0 . 7 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 2 3 6 4 P L P F 0 . 8 1
H-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
) G W A ( e z i S e r i W r e r u t c a f u n a M r e b m u N t r a P g n i t a R ) . t f / f p ( p a C
4 1 . p r o C e l b a C & e r i W s a l t A P T 1 - 1 - 4 1 - 8 2 2 L P F 5 . 4 1
e l b a C n a m e l o C 1 4 1 8 9 L P F 0 . 0 2
e l b a C n a m e l o C 0 2 4 8 9 R L P F 0 . 5 2
n o i t a r o p r o C n a r t m o C 0 4 2 4 R L P F 0 . 1 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B 0 8 5 9 R L P F 0 . 7 2
. o C e l b a C & e r i W n e d l e B J U 0 2 1 6 P L P F 9 . 5 2
C C S B E 2 0 4 1 4 3 P L P F 0 . 0 2
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 2 5 0 4 L P F 0 . 9 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 3 3 4 4 R L P F 0 . 9 1
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 3 3 6 4 P L P F 0 . 0 2
2 1 e l b a C n a m e l o C 1 2 1 8 9 L P F 0 . 7 2
e l b a C n a m e l o C 0 0 2 8 9 R L P F 0 . 9 2
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 4 5 0 4 L P F 0 . 1 2
s m e t s y S e l b a C s i s e n e G 4 3 4 4 R L P F 0 . 2 2
EXAMPLE NO. 1
Determine the recommended wire size for a daisy-chained, Class-B, Style-4 SLC with 160 RCUs and a total wire length of
7,500 feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs, and is not the linear distance from
the control unit to the most-remote RCU.
Try #14 AWG wire.
The total SLC wiring resistance is:
7,500 ft. X 2.525 /1,000 ft. = 18.9 .
If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is:
3,750 ft. x 20 x 10
-12
farads/ft. = .075 x 10
-6
farads (or, 0.075 f).
Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141, is acceptable.
Note: Capacitance values correspond to a pair of wires as compared to resistance values that correspond to a single
conductor. The wire-pair length for this SLC is 3,750 feet, and this value is used for the SLCs capacitance
calculation.
EXAMPLE NO. 2
Determine the proper wire size for a Class-A, Style-6 SLC with 100 RCUs and a total wire length 6,000 feet. The total wire
length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs for both the primary and redundant communications
circuits, and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU.
Try #18 AWG wire first. The total SLC wiring resistance is using #18 AWG is:
6,000 ft. X 6.385 /1,000 ft. = 38.3 .
The total SLC wiring resistance (38.3 ) when using #18 AWG wire exceeds the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 .
Use larger wire.
Try #16 AWG next. The total SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG is:
6,000 ft. X 4.016 /1,000 ft. = 24.1 .
H-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The total SLC wiring resistance (24.1 ) when using #16 AWG wire is less than the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26
. The SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG wire is acceptable.
If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is:
3,000 ft. x 20 x 10
-12
farads/ft. = .06 x 10
-6
farads (or, 0.06 f).
Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161, is acceptable.
H-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
I-1 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
APPENDIX I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS
This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys system modules.
Component Page No.
Central Control Module I-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module I-6
Power Supply Module (Revision XC) I-8
Power Supply Module (Revision AC) I-9
Agent Release Module I-11
Signal Audible Module I-14
Relay Output Module I-17
City Tie Module I-18
Basic I/O Motherboard I-20
Multi-Loop Motherboard I-22
Addressable Input Device I-24
Addressable Output Device I-25
Addressable Input Device I-26
Addressable Output Device I-27
I-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
0
V
P
O
R
T
P
R
I
N
T
D
I
S
P
P
O
R
T
P
O
R
T
J
K
1
J
K
2
5
V
2
4
V
0
V
T
O
R
E
M
O
T
E
P
C
F
O
R
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
I
N
G
T
O
E
X
T
E
R
N
A
L
P
R
I
N
T
E
R
P
L
G
1
P
C
D
IS
P
L
A
Y
5
V
J
K
3
1
B
T
1
J
P
2
P
L
G
2
C
C
M
R
E
S
E
T
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
2
J
P
4
B
U
T
T
O
M
S
W
1
J
P
3
T
B
4
T
B
5
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
1
R E P 1
-
-
A
+
+
B
R E P 2
-
A
+
J
P
1
C
V
O
L
T
F
R
E
E
R
E
L
A
Y
S
T
B
1
T
B
2
-
B
+
N
O
N
O
C
N
C 1
N
C 2
T
B
3
F
A
U
L
T
V
/F
R
E
L
A
Y
N
C
N
O
C
2
4
V
D
C
F
R
O
M
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
F L T
E A R T H
F L T
S U P P L Y
0 V
2 4 V
T
B
6
I
C
1
J
K
4
P O R T
J
K
5
R S - 4 8 5
P O R T
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
L
O
O
P
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
R X / T X
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
S
K
T
1
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
R
E
S
E
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
P L G 2J K 1
J K 2
P L G 3
S W 1
P L G 2
J K 3
P L G 1
P
R
I
N
T
P
O
R
T
D
S
1
0 V
2 4 V D C
E A R T H F A U L T
S U P P L Y F A U L T
T B 6
B
U
Z
Z
E
R
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
O
R
P
O
R
T
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
P
O
R
T
P
C
P
O
R
T
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
L
E
D
2
4
V
D
C
F
R
O
M
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
O
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
A
N
D
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display and Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
I-3 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display and Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
3
.
A
L
L
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
(
V
O
L
T
/
F
R
E
E
R
E
L
A
Y
S
A
N
D
V
/
F
R
E
L
A
Y
)
A
R
E
R
A
T
E
D
B
E
T
W
E
E
N
T
H
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
H
E
A
D
A
N
D
T
H
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
A
N
E
L
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
6
.
T
O
G
U
A
R
A
N
T
E
E
T
H
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
A
T
T
H
E
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
D
E
V
I
C
E
,
T
H
E
E
X
:
T
O
D
E
T
E
R
M
I
N
E
T
H
E
T
O
T
A
L
L
O
O
P
L
E
N
G
T
H
,
M
E
A
S
U
R
E
T
H
E
D
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
2
.
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
/
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
A
R
E
R
A
T
E
D
A
T
2
4
V
D
C
,
2
A
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
.
4
.
S
I
G
N
A
L
O
U
T
P
U
T
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
T
H
E
U
S
E
O
F
E
N
D
O
F
L
I
N
E
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
(
E
O
R
)
-
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
O
R
Y
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
-
2
.
4
m
A
/
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
F
O
L
L
O
W
I
N
G
T
A
B
L
E
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
U
S
E
D
.
B
L
O
C
K
,
T
H
E
N
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
Y
B
Y
T
W
O
.
A
T
3
0
V
D
C
,
1
A
.
1
0
K
,
0
.
5
W
;
N
O
T
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
D
W
I
T
H
P
A
N
E
L
.
1
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
F
O
R
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
1
S
I
G
N
A
L
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
A
G
E
N
T
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
J
P
1
J
P
4
J
P
2
J
P
3
N
O
T
E
S
:
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
V
O
L
T
F
R
E
E
R
E
L
A
Y
S
C
(
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
A
B
L
E
)
N
O
N
C
T
B
1
,
T
B
2
V
/
F
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
N
O
N
C
C
T
B
3
-
F
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
-
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
8
.
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
F
E
N
W
A
L
D
A
T
A
S
H
E
E
T
S
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
O
F
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
D
U
R
I
N
G
N
O
R
M
A
L
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
M
O
D
E
.
9
.
F
O
R
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
S
I
G
N
A
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
7
5
.
X
X
X
1
0
.
L S
A
V
A
I
L
A
B
L
E
A
S
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
0
6
-
1
2
9
5
2
0
-
0
0
1
(
K
I
T
O
F
5
0
)
.
N
O
T
E
:
T
H
E
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
L
A
Y
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S
A
R
E
S
H
O
W
N
I
N
T
H
E
U
N
P
O
W
E
R
E
D
S
T
A
T
E
.
5
.
I
F
M
P
0
1
I
S
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
E
D
A
S
A
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
,
A
2
2
0
O
H
M
(
5
W
M
I
N
.
)
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
C
O
U
L
D
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
T
H
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
I
F
N
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
.
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:
D
O
N
O
T
U
S
E
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
I
F
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
.
7
.
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
O
N
E
#
1
2
A
W
G
W
I
R
E
P
E
R
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
.
"
O
N
"
T
I
M
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
T
-
-
-

F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
.
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

I
m
a
x
.
B
,
D
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
G
R
O
U
P
E
,
G
F
M
D
E
V
I
C
E
A
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
(
m
i
n
.
)
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
7
0
0
m
A
4
5
8
m
A
2
4
0
m
A
4
2
0
m
A
2
.
4
A
1
.
5
A
2
.
4
A
2
.
0
A
2
4
0
m
A
4
4
0
m
A
2
2
5
m
A
5
2
0
m
A
8
9
0
1
8
1
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
7
4
9
4
8
9
9
1
7
5
8
9
5
6
3
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
5
7
O
H
M
1
0
O
H
M
3
4
O
H
M
5
2
O
H
M
1
0
8
O
H
M
4
6
O
H
M
1
0
3
O
H
M
1
5
.
9
O
H
M
1
0
.
8
O
H
M
1
2
O
H
M
1
0
3
O
H
M
5
9
O
H
M
1
8
A
W
G
8
0
0
2
2
0
3
4
0
3
4
0
8
0
0
3
7
0
G
R
O
U
P
7
6
0
1
5
7
0
E
,
G
5
2
5
R E L E A S I N G
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
7
4
9
4
F
M
8
9
0
1
8
1
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
9
1
7
5
2
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
4
0
5
0
0
7
6
0
7
6
0
2
0
0
0
W
I
R
E
L
E
N
G
T
H
(
F
T
.
)
1
4
A
W
G
3
0
0
0
9
4
0
1
4
4
0
1
4
4
0
3
0
0
0
3
8
0
AB
,
D
3
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
A
W
G
1
2
0
0
1
5
0
3
0
0
4
8
0
4
8
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
6
A
W
G
1
2
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
8
9
5
6
3
0
8
0
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
5
7
0
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
1
4
6
0
2
3
0
0
9
1
5
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
C
O
M
M
E
N
T
-
-
-

F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
.
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
A
,
B
,
D
,
E
,
G
S
P
R
I
N
K
L
E
R
F
M
G
R
O
U
P
S
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
9
1
7
5
8
9
7
4
9
4
8
9
0
1
8
1
8
9
5
6
3
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
I-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
2
E
O
R
=
1
0
K
O
H
M
E
O
R
N
/
A
5
+
4
-
3
+ -
B A
C
L
A
S
S
B

Y
"
S
T
Y
L
E
T
B
4
O
R
T
B
5
C
L
A
S
S
A

Z
"
S
T
Y
L
E
25
+
4
-
3
+ -
B A
T
B
4
O
R
T
B
5
S
L
S
L
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display and Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
I-5 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
6
O
H
M
S
.
W
H
T
S
A
F
E
T
Y
F
U
S
E
N
O
T
E
S
:
Y
E
L
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
6
.
0
O
H
M
S
.
N
O
T
E
S
:
S
B
L
K
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
9
1
7
5
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
6
O
H
M
S
.
1
.
F
O
R
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
2
.
M
I
C
R
O
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
B
L
U
S
N
O
T
E
S
:
B
L
K
T
B
4
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
0
1
8
1
,
8
9
5
6
3
0
S
I
N
G
L
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
H
E
A
D
1
2
L
2-
3
3+
T
B
4
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
7
O
H
M
S
.
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
4
8
6
5
0
0
,
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
R
E
D
N
O
T
E
S
:
T
B
4
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
7
4
9
4
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
T
B
4
2
.
5
O
H
M
S
-
G
R
O
U
P
E
,
G
1
.
5
O
H
M
S
-
G
R
O
U
P
S
B
,
D
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
:
2
.
3
O
H
M
S
-
G
R
O
U
P
A
N
O
T
E
S
:
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
G
R
O
U
P
S
A
,
B
,
D
,
E
,
G
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
T
B
4
1
.
F
O
R
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
2
.
1
.
F
O
R
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
2
.
1
.
F
O
R
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
2
.
1
.
F
O
R
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
2
.
L
LL
S
L
2-
3+
2-
3+
2-
3+
2-
3+
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display and Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
I-6 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
R
S
2
3
2
P
O
R
T
F
O
R
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
W
I
T
H
C
C
M
.
N
O
T
E
S
:
1
.
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
M
A
Y
U
T
I
L
I
Z
E
T
-
T
A
P
W
I
R
I
N
G
M
E
T
H
O
D
I
N
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
4
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
O
N
L
Y
.
2
.
4
.
A
R
R
A
N
G
E
M
E
N
T
S
F
O
R
P
C
L
I
N
E
W
I
R
I
N
G
P
L
U
G
I
N
T
H
E
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
(
R
X
T
X
)
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
1
A
N
D
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
T
U
S
I
N
G
F
L
E
X
C
A
B
L
E
S
T
O
J
3
O
N
R
X
T
X
.
M
A
K
E
S
U
R
E
T
H
A
T
U
N
E
V
E
N
P
I
N
S
A
R
E
S
I
G
N
A
L
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S
M
A
X
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
:
M
I
N
.
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
:
M
A
X
.
L
I
N
E
C
A
P
A
C
I
T
A
N
C
E
:
M
A
X
.
L
I
N
E
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
:
M
A
X
.
N
U
M
B
E
R
O
F
R
C
U
'
S
:
M
A
X
.
R
I
P
P
L
E
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
:
2
6
.
4
V
D
C
1
9
.
0
V
D
C
0
.
2
5
u
F
2
6
.
0
O
H
M
S
2
5
5
1
0
0
m
V
R
M
S
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
S
U
S
E
D
:
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
'
S
.7
0
-
4
0
1
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
7
0
-
4
0
1
0
0
4
-
0
0
0
7
1
-
4
0
1
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
7
1
-
4
0
1
0
0
4
-
0
0
0
7
0
-
4
0
2
0
0
1
-
1
0
0
7
1
-
4
0
2
0
0
1
-
1
0
0
7
0
-
4
0
4
0
0
1
-
1
0
0
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
I
N
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
:
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
4
-
0
0
1
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
3
-
0
0
1
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
2
-
0
0
X
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
'
S
.
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
:
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
2
-
0
0
0
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
.
'
S
L
E
D
1
-
R
E
D
L
E
D
I
N
D
I
C
A
T
E
S
R
X
T
X
R
E
S
E
T
W
H
E
N
O
N
.
L
E
D
2
-
G
R
E
E
N
L
E
D
I
N
D
I
C
A
T
E
S
N
O
R
M
A
L
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
R
X
T
X
P
C
L
I
N
E
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
E
R
W
H
E
N
B
L
I
N
K
I
N
G
.
S
W
1
-
C
P
U
R
E
S
E
T
.
S
W
2
-
P
C
L
I
N
E
R
E
S
T
/
D
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
2
4
V
F
R
O
M
T
E
R
M
.
2
&
3
.
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
:
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
.
'
S
R
X
T
X
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
1
E
L
E
C
T
.
B
O
X
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
2
B
A
S
E
M
O
U
N
T
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
4
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
T
1
K I D D E - F E N W A L , I N C .
RX/TX
76-100005-001
L
E
D
1
L
E
D
2
S
W
2
S
W
1
T
1
J
2
J
1
1
2 1
J
3
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
1
T
O
F
U
L
L
Y
U
T
I
L
I
Z
E
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
.
S
T
Y
L
E
6
(
4
-
W
I
R
E
)
P
C
L
I
N
E
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
I
S
R
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
E
D
C
A
N
B
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
O
N
P
C
L
I
N
E
.
N
O
M
O
R
E
T
H
A
N
3
0
L
O
O
P
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
2
0
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
E
X
C
L
U
D
I
N
G
O
N
E
O
N
R
X
/
T
X
3
.
F
R
O
M
P
O
W
E
R
2
4
V
D
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y
R
X
/
T
X
C
P
U
R
E
S
E
T
P
C
L
I
N
E
N
O
R
M
A
L
C
P
U
R
E
S
E
T
P
C
L
I
N
E
R
E
S
E
T
R
X
/
T
X
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
1
A S H L A N D , M A 0 1 7 2 1
SHORT-2 SHORT-1
R
X
/T
X
L
O
O
P
IS
O
L
A
T
O
R
J 3
J
P
2
J
P
3
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
4
W
2
W
1
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
4
3 4 2 1
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
2
5
5
L
O
O
P
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
P
E
R
R
X
/
T
X
L
O
O
P
.
A
N
Y
C
O
M
B
I
N
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
D
E
V
I
C
E
T
Y
P
E
I
S
A
C
C
E
P
T
A
B
L
E
.
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
B
E
T
W
E
E
N
T
W
O
A
D
J
A
C
E
N
T
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
.
5
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
O
N
E
#
1
2
A
W
G
W
I
R
E
P
E
R
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
W
1
&
W
2
J
P
3
J
P
2
I
N
I
N
O
P
E
N
S
T
Y
L
E
4
O
P
E
N
O
U
T
O
P
E
N
O
U
T
S
H
O
R
T
E
D
S
H
O
R
T
E
D
S
T
Y
L
E
6
w
/
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
.
S
T
Y
L
E
7
4
.
1
-
S
T
Y
L
E
S
E
V
E
N
(
7
)
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
S
T
H
E
U
S
E
O
F
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
,
T
H
E
R
X
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
S
T
H
E
U
S
E
O
F
O
N
E
(
1
)
P
/
N
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
1
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
M
O
D
U
L
E
T
O
O
P
E
R
A
T
E
I
N
T
H
E
S
T
Y
L
E
7
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
.
4
.
2
-
W
H
E
N
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
U
S
E
D
:
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
.
2
4
V
D
C
(
R
E
D
)
R
E
T
(
B
L
K
)
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
A
L
)
7
0
-
4
0
3
0
0
1
-
X
X
X
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
8
-
0
0
2
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
8
-
0
0
1
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
4
-
0
0
1
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
.
7
7
-
2
9
7
1
0
3
-
0
0
0
O
R
I
O
N
X
T
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
T
Y
L
E
6
S
H
O
R
T
E
D
I
N
I
N
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module
(PEGAsys)
I-7 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module
(PEGAsys)
D
E
N
O
T
E
S
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
I
N
P
U
T
&
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
.
T
H
I
S
D
E
V
I
C
E
I
S
N
O
T
P
O
L
A
R
I
Z
E
D
.
1234
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
6
S
I
G
N
A
L
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
4
S
I
G
N
A
L
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
4 23 1
N
O
T
E
S
:
1
.
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
A
R
E
P
O
L
A
R
I
Z
E
D
.
S
E
E
D
E
T
A
I
L
E
D
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
.
2
.
3
.
F
O
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
T
O
T
H
E
L
O
O
P
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
O
T
H
E
R
T
H
A
N
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
,
S
E
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
S
O
F
T
H
E
P
A
R
T
I
C
U
L
A
R
D
E
V
I
C
E
.
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
7
S
I
G
N
A
L
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
-
F
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
4
.
L
L
S
L
S
S
-
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
5
.
F
O
R
S
T
Y
L
E
7
W
I
R
I
N
G
B
E
T
W
E
E
N
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
A
N
D
A
D
J
A
C
E
N
T
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
M
U
S
T
B
E
I
N
C
O
N
D
U
I
T
,
N
O
M
O
R
E
T
H
A
N
2
0
F
E
E
T
F
R
O
M
D
E
V
I
C
E
.
6
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
2
0
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
P
E
R
R
X
/
T
X
L
O
O
P
,
E
X
C
L
U
D
I
N
G
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
O
N
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
.
N
O
T
E
:
A
D
J
A
C
E
N
T
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
M
U
S
T
B
E
W
I
T
H
I
N
2
0
F
E
E
T
O
F
D
E
V
I
C
E
W
I
T
H
W
I
R
I
N
G
I
N
C
O
N
D
U
I
T
.
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
7
4
-
2
0
0
0
1
2
-
0
0
1
M
U
S
T
B
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
O
N
R
X
/
T
X
W
H
E
N
U
S
I
N
G
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
.
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
6
S
I
G
N
A
L
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
/
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
T
B
1
O
F
R
X
/
T
X
1
2
3
4
3
7
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P
3
7
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P
7
3
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P
L
O
O
P
7
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
3
T
B
1
O
F
R
X
/
T
X
1
2
3
4
7
3
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
3
7
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
5
Z
O
N
E
3
Z
O
N
E
1
Z
O
N
E
2
Z
O
N
E
3
Z
O
N
E
2
Z
O
N
E
1
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
B
A
S
E
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
L
O
O
P
L
S
L
S
I-8 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
2
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
1
P
O
W
E
R
M
U
S
T
B
E
G
R
E
A
T
E
R
T
H
A
N
2
2
V
D
C
B
E
F
O
R
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
N
G
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:
T
H
E
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
F
O
R
T
H
E
T
W
O
B
A
T
T
E
R
I
E
S
I
N
S
E
R
I
E
S
W
1
-
C
U
T
O
U
T
W
1
T
O
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
E
T
H
E
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
1
5
A
F
U
S
E
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
C
C
M
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
T
O
1
.
5
A
2
4
V
D
C
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
O
U
T
P
U
T
#
1
,
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
T
O
1
.
5
A
2
4
V
D
C
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
O
U
T
P
U
T
#
2
,
E
A
R
T
H
G
R
O
U
N
D
A
C
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
I
N
(
1
2
0
/
2
4
0
V
A
C
,
6
0
/
5
0
H
z
)
A
C
L
I
N
E
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
S
H
A
R
I
N
G
C
O
M
M
O
N
F
O
R
B
O
T
H
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
R
E
M
O
V
E
T
H
E
J
U
M
P
E
R
O
T
H
E
R
W
I
S
E
.
S
U
P
P
L
Y
B
O
A
R
D
I
S
H
O
O
K
E
D
A
S
T
H
E
W
4
-
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
T
H
E
J
U
M
P
E
R
I
F
T
H
E
P
O
W
E
R
L
A
S
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
O
N
T
H
E
R
S
4
8
5
I
/
O
B
U
S
.
I
/
O
B
U
S
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
T
O
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
R
S
-
4
8
5
T
W
I
S
T
E
D
P
A
I
R
I
/
O
B
U
S
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
F
R
O
M
C
C
M
R
A
T
E
D
A
T
2
A
,
3
0
V
D
C
R
E
L
A
Y
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
K I D D E - F E N W A L , I N C .
0
6
-
1
2
9
5
6
2
-
0
0
2
M O T H E R B D C C M R S 4 8 5
(
N
O
T
E
5
)
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
.
B A
A S H L A N D , M A 0 1 7 2 1
(
N
O
T
E
2
)
(
N
O
T
E
2
)
(
N
O
T
E
1
)
V
O
L
T
-
F
R
E
E
A
U
X
2
R
R E T
A
U
X
1
2 4 V
R E T
2 4 V
L
L
R R
1
5
A
S Y S T E M P O W E R
R
E
T
2
4
V
2
4
V
R
E
T
2
4
V
R
E
T
- +
B A T
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
2
A
C
L
I
N
E
O
U
T
T
O
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
2
A
C
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
O
U
T
T
O
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
1
A
C
L
I
N
E
O
U
T
T
O
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
#
1
A
C
.
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
O
U
T
T
O
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
F
I
E
L
D
N
A
C
IN
1 A
C
O
U
T
N
L
N
2
L
L
D
C
IN
1
G
2 4 V
R E T
S P V
D
C
IN
2
R E T
S H A R E
2 4 V
S P V
F
F
R
O
M
F
R
O
M
T
H
E
S
A
M
E
R
O
O
M
W
I
T
H
T
H
E
M
A
I
N
P
A
N
E
L
.
5
.
A
L
L
R
S
-
4
8
5
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
M
U
S
T
B
E
W
I
T
H
I
N
O
R
A
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
B
Y
L
O
C
A
L
C
O
D
E
S
.
4
.
B
A
T
T
E
R
I
E
S
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
R
E
P
L
A
C
E
D
E
V
E
R
Y
4
8
M
O
N
T
H
S
6
.

S
Y
S
G
N
D

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
O
F
T
B
6
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
2
4
V
R
E
T
U
R
N
S
B
E
T
W
E
E
N
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
.
7
.
S
O
L
D
E
R
A
0
O
H
M
,
1
/
4
W
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
A
C
R
O
S
S
W
5
P
A
D
S
W
H
E
N
U
S
I
N
G
2
2
0
V
A
C
P
O
W
E
R
.
-
F
O
R
R
E
G
U
L
A
T
E
D
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
,
2
0
.
4
V
D
C
T
O
2
6
.
4
V
D
C
.
-
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
F
A
I
L
U
R
E
-
F
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
-
L
O
W
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
H
E
L
D
I
N
R
E
S
E
T
.
A
T
0
V
A
S
L
O
N
G
A
S
T
H
E
M
I
C
R
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
S
P
R
E
S
S
I
N
G
S
3
.
T
H
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
M
A
I
N
T
A
I
N
E
D
M
A
N
U
A
L
R
E
S
E
T
O
F
T
H
E
M
I
C
R
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
B
Y
M
A
Y
B
E
C
A
U
S
E
D
E
I
T
H
E
R
B
Y
S
O
F
T
W
A
R
E
O
R
B
Y
T
H
E
M
I
C
R
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
S
I
N
R
E
S
E
T
.
T
H
I
S
R
E
S
E
T
S
H
A
L
L
T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
F
R
O
M
2
4
V
D
C
T
O
0
V
W
H
E
N
E
V
E
R
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
E
D
T
O
B
E
R
E
S
E
T
T
A
B
L
E
,
T
H
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
2
.
W
H
E
N
A
N
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
O
U
T
P
U
T
I
S
A
S
L
O
N
G
A
S
T
H
E
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
L
A
Y
I
S
I
N
T
H
E
N
.
O
.
T
H
E
G
R
E
E
N
L
E
D
,
D
S
1
,
S
H
A
L
L
R
E
M
A
I
N
I
L
L
U
M
I
N
A
T
E
D
-
G
R
O
U
N
D
F
A
U
L
T
(
P
O
S
I
T
I
V
E
O
R
N
E
G
A
T
I
V
E
)
-
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
A
I
L
-
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
F
A
I
L
-
M
I
C
R
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
F
A
I
L
U
R
E
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
S
I
N
C
L
U
D
E
:
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
F
I
E
L
D
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
F
I
E
L
D
A
C
I
D
B
A
T
T
E
R
I
E
S
S
E
A
L
E
D
L
E
A
D
(
2
)
1
2
V
D
C
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
S
O
T
H
A
T
I
T
M
A
Y
U
S
E
A
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
P
A
I
R
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
C
H
A
R
G
E
D
B
Y
A
N
O
T
H
E
R
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
.
R L
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
-
A
C
F
A
I
L
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
(
4
.
0
A
D
C
)
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
I
O
N
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
(
4
.
0
A
D
C
)
2
4
V
D
C
R
E
T
U
R
N
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
I
O
N
N
O
T
E
S
:
G
N
D
S
Y
S
N
C
T B L R L Y
C
N
O
G
R
E
E
N
L
E
D
-
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
.
S
3
.
1
.
T
H
E
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
L
A
Y
I
S
S
H
O
W
N
I
N
T
H
E
U
N
P
O
W
E
R
E
D
S
T
A
T
E
A
N
D
W
I
L
L
T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
U
P
O
N
A
N
Y
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
O
F
F
C
O
N
D
I
T
I
O
N
.
B
A
T
T
E
R
I
E
S
T
O
P
A
N
E
L
.
S
3
S
1
S
2
122 1
S
1
A
N
D
S
2
U
S
E
T
O
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
/
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
.
S
3
:
H
A
R
D
R
E
S
E
T
O
F
M
I
C
R
O
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
O
R
O
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
/
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
B
O
A
R
D
.
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
7
I-9 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
2 4 V
R E T
A
C
O
U
T
1
A
C
I
N
2
2 4 V
R E T
N
L
N
L
N
D
C
I
N
1
L
G
D
C
I
N
2
S P V
S P V
S H A R E
W
H
T
B
L
K
/
W
H
T
B
L
K
B
L
K
V
I
O
R
E
D
R
E
D
O
R
N
W
H
T
B
L
K
/
W
H
T
O
R
N
R
E
DB
L
K
V
I
O
B
L
K
R
E
D
M
A
I
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
I-10 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
N
O
T
E
S
:
5
.
T
O
G
U
A
R
A
N
T
E
E
T
H
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
A
T
3
.
S
I
G
N
A
L
O
U
T
P
U
T
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
T
H
E
U
S
E
O
F
E
N
D
O
F
2
.
N
O
M
I
N
A
L
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
2
4
.
0
V
D
C
1
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
U
T
P
U
T
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
S
:
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
S
7
.
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
S
76-200001-001
RELEASE
K
ID
D
E
-F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
1
2
T
B
1
1
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
Q
B
1
S
1
S
O
L
0
6
-1
2
9
5
6
7
-0
0
1
M
O
D
U
L
E
O
N
S
3
S
4
-
F
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
1
0
.
-
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
D
A
T
A
S
H
E
E
T
S
7
5
.
X
X
X
S
E
R
I
E
S
9
.
F
O
R
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
S
I
G
N
A
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
8
.
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
S
S
4
,
2
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
B
L
O
C
K
,
T
H
E
N
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
Y
B
Y
T
W
O
.
O
N
O
N
18 7 5 34 26
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S D
U
A
L
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
1
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
O
F
F
S
O
L
S
Q
B
S
3
,
2
XX
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
4
,
1
- X
L
A
N
D
T
H
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
A
N
E
L
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
B
E
T
W
E
E
N
T
H
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
H
E
A
D
L
E
N
G
T
H
,
M
E
A
S
U
R
E
T
H
E
D
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
E
X
:
T
O
D
E
T
E
R
M
I
N
E
T
H
E
T
O
T
A
L
L
O
O
P
T
H
E
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
D
E
V
I
C
E
,
T
H
E
F
O
L
L
O
W
I
N
G
L
I
N
E
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
(
E
O
R
)
-
1
0
K
,
0
.
5
W
;
N
O
T
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
D
T
A
B
L
E
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
U
S
E
D
.
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
-
2
.
4
A
(
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
)
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
-
2
.
0
A
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
R
E
S
E
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
L
E
D
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
6
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
6
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
1
6
.
T
H
E
F
O
L
L
O
W
I
N
G
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
M
U
S
T
B
E
S
E
T
F
O
R
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
(
S
)
.
1
1
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
W
1
&
W
2
M
U
S
T
B
E
C
U
T
O
U
T
W
H
E
N
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
P
U
T
I
S
U
S
E
D
.
1 12 2
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
O
R
Y
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
-
2
.
4
m
A
/
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
1
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
8
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
P
E
R
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
W
I
T
H
P
A
N
E
L
.
A
V
A
I
L
A
B
L
E
A
S
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
0
6
-
1
2
9
5
2
0
-
0
0
1
(
K
I
T
O
F
5
0
)
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
O
N
E
#
1
2
A
W
G
W
I
R
E
P
E
R
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
.
-
2
.
0
A
(
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
)
4
.
A
2
2
0
O
H
M
(
5
W
M
I
N
)
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
C
O
U
L
D
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
T
H
E
R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
I
F
N
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
.
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:
D
O
N
O
T
U
S
E
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
I
F
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
.
1
8
A
W
G
8
0
0
2
2
0
3
4
0
3
4
0
8
0
0
3
7
0
G
R
O
U
P
7
6
0
1
5
7
0
E
,
G
5
2
5
R E L E A S I N G
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
7
4
9
4
F
M
8
9
0
1
8
1
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
9
1
7
5
2
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
4
0
5
0
0
7
6
0
7
6
0
2
0
0
0
W
I
R
E
L
E
N
G
T
H
(
F
T
.
)
1
4
A
W
G
3
0
0
0
9
4
0
1
4
4
0
1
4
4
0
3
0
0
0
3
8
0
AB
,
D
3
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
A
W
G
1
2
0
0
1
5
0
3
0
0
4
8
0
4
8
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
6
A
W
G
1
2
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
8
9
5
6
3
0
8
0
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
5
7
0
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
1
4
6
0
2
3
0
0
9
1
5
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
C
O
M
M
E
N
T
-
-
-

F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
.
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
L
E
A
S
I
N
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
"
O
N
"
T
I
M
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
T
-
-
-

F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
.
U
L
L
I
S
T
E
D
O
N
L
Y
.
N
O
T
F
M
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

I
m
a
x
.
B
,
D
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
G
R
O
U
P
E
,
G
F
M
D
E
V
I
C
E
A
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
(
m
i
n
.
)
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
M
O
M
E
N
T
A
R
Y
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
7
0
0
m
A
4
5
8
m
A
2
4
0
m
A
4
2
0
m
A
2
.
4
A
1
.
5
A
2
.
4
A
2
.
0
A
2
4
0
m
A
4
4
0
m
A
2
2
5
m
A
5
2
0
m
A
8
9
0
1
8
1
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
7
4
9
4
8
9
9
1
7
5
8
9
5
6
3
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
5
7
O
H
M
1
0
O
H
M
3
4
O
H
M
5
2
O
H
M
1
0
8
O
H
M
4
6
O
H
M
1
0
3
O
H
M
1
5
.
9
O
H
M
1
0
.
8
O
H
M
1
2
O
H
M
1
0
3
O
H
M
5
9
O
H
M
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
A
,
B
,
D
,
E
,
G
S
P
R
I
N
K
L
E
R
F
M
G
R
O
U
P
S
4
8
6
5
0
0
8
9
9
1
7
5
8
9
7
4
9
4
8
9
0
1
8
1
8
9
5
6
3
0
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
8
1
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
2
9
-
0
0
1
0
6
-
1
1
8
3
8
4
-
0
0
1
I-11 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
7
O
H
M
S
.
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
7
4
9
4
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
4
8
6
5
0
0
,
4
8
6
5
0
0
-
0
1
+
2
4
V
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
6
.
0
O
H
M
S
.
W
H
E
N
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
U
S
E
D
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
W
1
&
W
2
T
O
B
E
R
E
M
O
V
E
D
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
C
K
T
#
1
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
0
1
8
1
A
N
D
8
9
5
6
3
0
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
8
9
9
1
7
5
T
B
1
C
K
T
#
2
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
6
O
H
M
S
.
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
0
.
6
O
H
M
S
.
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
N
O
T
E
S
: S
A
F
E
T
Y
F
U
S
E
W
H
T
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
Y
E
L
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
M
I
C
R
O
S
W
I
T
C
H
B
L
U
S
N
O
T
E
S
:
1
B
L
K
6
3
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
H
E
A
D
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
2
5 4 3 2 1
T
B
1
4
W
H
T
W
H
T
B
L
U
6 5 4
S
Y
E
L
B
L
K
Y
E
L
B
L
K
N
O
T
E
:
N
O
T
E
S
:
6 5 4
S
R
E
T
.
6 5
C
K
T
#
2
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
B
L
U
3 2 1
S
1
B
L
K
T
B
1
6
D
U
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
H
E
A
D
S S
2
1
3
2
3
5 4 3 2 1
C
K
T
#
1
T
B
1
R
E
D
3 2 1
N
O
T
E
S
:
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
T
B
1
3 2 1 6
S
5 4 23 1
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
T
B
1
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
4
1
0
R
E
D
B
L
K
2
T
B
1
1
C
K
T
#
2
S
6 5
1
1
1
2
C
K
T
#
2
+ - +
C
K
T
#
2
B
L
K
R
E
D
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
C
K
T
#
1
S
T
B
1
3 2 1
6
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
T
B
1
C
K
T
#
1
5 4 23 1
T
B
1
9 8 7
C
K
T
#
1
C
K
T
#
2
- + -
S
1
0
K
E
O
R
L
S S
1
0
K
E
O
R
L
1
0
K
E
O
R
L
SS
LL
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+- - +
+- +-
+- +-
+- +-
+- +-
+- +-
+-+-
+- +-
I-12 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
I
S
T
O
B
E
2
.
5
O
H
M
S
.
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
G
R
O
U
P
E
,
G
G
R
O
U
P
B
,
D
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
I
S
T
O
B
E
1
.
5
O
H
M
S
.
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
1
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
1
A
T
"
S
O
L
"
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
.
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
3
,
1
T
O
"
O
F
F
"
.
2
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
W
I
R
I
N
G
R
E
S
I
S
T
A
N
C
E
I
S
T
O
B
E
2
.
3
O
H
M
S
.
C
K
T
#
2
G
R
O
U
P
A
(
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
)
C
K
T
#
1
N
O
T
E
S
:
6 5 4 23 1
T
B
1
4
N
O
T
E
S
:
S
6 5
C
K
T
#
2
6 5 4 23 1
C
K
T
#
1
T
B
1
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
N
O
T
E
S
:
T
B
1
3 2 1
6
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
5 4 3 2 1
T
B
1
4
C
K
T
#
2
S
6 5
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
C
K
T
#
1
S
T
B
1
3 2 1
6
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
S S
T
B
1
5 4 3 2 1
F
M
G
R
O
U
P
S
P
R
I
N
K
L
E
R
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
S
S
I
N
G
L
E
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S S
T
W
O
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D
S
C
K
T
#
1
C
K
T
#
2
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+- +-
+- +-
+-
+- +-
+- +-
+-
+-
+-
+-
I-13 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
N
O
T
E
S
:
3
.
S
I
G
N
A
L
O
U
T
P
U
T
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
T
H
E
U
S
E
O
F
E
N
D
O
F
L
I
N
E
2
.
N
O
M
I
N
A
L
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
2
4
.
0
V
D
C
1
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
U
T
P
U
T
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
S
:
4
.
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
76-100003-001
1
2
T
B
1
1
O
N
L
Y
P
O
L
A
R
I
Z
E
D
S
I
G
N
A
L
L
I
N
G
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
.
-
F
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
I
M
I
T
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
7
.
-
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
D
A
T
A
S
H
E
E
T
S
7
5
.
X
X
X
S
E
R
I
E
S
.
6
.
F
O
R
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
S
I
G
N
A
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
S
S
W
1
,
2
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
N
18 7 5 34 26
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
S
W
2
,
2
S
W
1
,
1
L
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
(
E
O
R
)
-
1
0
K
,
0
.
5
W
;
N
O
T
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
D
W
I
T
H
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
O
R
Y
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
-
2
.
4
m
A
/
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
-
2
.
0
A
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
S
R
E
S
E
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
L
E
D
8
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
W
9
&
W
1
0
M
U
S
T
B
E
C
U
T
O
U
T
W
H
E
N
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
P
U
T
I
S
U
S
E
D
.
N
O
T
U
S
E
D
S
W
I
T
C
H
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
9
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
8
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
P
E
R
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
5
.
E
I
T
H
E
R
S
O
U
N
D
E
R
O
U
T
P
U
T
(
2
)
M
A
Y
B
E
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
E
D
F
O
R
E
I
T
H
E
R
2
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Y
"
O
R
1
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Z
"
,
U
S
I
N
G
J
U
M
P
E
R
A
N
D
D
I
P
S
W
I
T
C
H
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
S
H
O
W
N
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
S
2
&
3
.
11 2
K
ID
D
E
-F
E
N
W
A
L
,
IN
C
.
0
6
-1
2
9
5
6
9
-0
0
1
A
S
H
L
A
N
D
,
M
A
0
1
7
2
1
S
IG
N
A
L
A
U
D
IB
L
E
M
O
D
U
L
EO
N
21
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
S
S
I
G
N
M
E
N
T
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
4
1 21 2
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
8
1
-
4
P
A
N
E
L
.
A
V
A
I
L
A
B
L
E
A
S
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
0
6
-
1
2
9
5
2
0
-
0
0
1
(
K
I
T
O
F
5
0
)
.
1
0
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
O
F
O
N
E
#
1
2
A
W
G
W
I
R
E
P
E
R
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
.
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
5
SIG. AUD.
I-14 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
E
O
R
E
O
R
E
O
R
E
O
R
L
S
L
S
S
L
L
S
1
1
1
2
9
1
0
78 5
T
B
1
6
E
O
R
S
L
E
O
R
L
S
4
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Y
"
2
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Y
"
A
N
D
1
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Z
"
W
1
O
N
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
W
2
O
N
O
N
W
3
O
F
F
W
4
W
8
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
N
W
5
W
6
W
7
O
N
S
W
2
,
1
O
N
S
W
3
,
2
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
O
F
F
W
4
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
O
N
O
N
O
N
W
1
W
2
W
3
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
S
W
2
,
1
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
W
7
W
5
W
6
W
8
S
W
3
,
2
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
2 1
T
B
1
R
E
T
+
2
4
V
D
C
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
O
W
E
R
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
2
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
1
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
3
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
4
L
S
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
2
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
3
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
1
1
0
K
1
0
K
1
0
K
1
0
K
1
0
K
-
-++
--
++
E
O
R
1
0
K
1
0
K
1
1
1
2
9
1
0
78 5
T
B
1
6
-
-++
--
++
I-15 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
L
S
L
S
1
2
1
2
9
9
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
T
B
1
T
B
1
E
O
R
S
L
E
O
R
L
S
2
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Z
"
L
S
1
C
L
A
S
S
A
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Z
"
A
N
D
2
C
L
A
S
S
B
,
S
T
Y
L
E
"
Y
"
O
N
W
4
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
W
1
W
2
W
3
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
S
W
2
,
1
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
W
7
W
5
W
6
W
8
S
W
3
,
2
S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
S
W
2
,
1
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F
J
U
M
P
E
R
S
W
4
W
1
W
2
W
3
W
7
W
5
W
6
W
8
O
N
S
W
3
,
2
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
3
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
1
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
4
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
3
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
1
1
0
K
E
O
R
E
O
R
E
O
R
1
0
K
1
0
K
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
1
0
K
1
0
K
I-16 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Relay Output Module
(PEGAsys)
RELAY
76-10004-001
I-17 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
CITY TIE
76-100002-001
I-18 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
I-19 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
N
O
T
E
:
1
)
.
T
B
1
B
R
I
N
G
S
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
F
R
O
M
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
B
5
O
R
T
B
6
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
B
L
O
C
K
S
.
2
)
.
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
(
J
1
)
F
R
O
M
T
B
5
O
R
T
B
6
O
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
.
3
)
.
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
T
B
1
C
A
N
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
B
R
I
N
G
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
I
N
T
H
E
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
B
O
X
.
1
.
P
O
W
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
:
2
.
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
:
1
)
.
J
9
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
S
T
O
C
C
M
P
O
R
T
A
N
D
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
W
I
T
H
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
2
)
.
J
1
T
H
R
O
U
G
H
J
8
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
P
L
U
G
I
N
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
A
N
D
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
H
E
M
W
I
T
H
+
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
A
N
D
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
3
)
.
R
S
2
3
2
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
F
O
R
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
T
O
B
E
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
T
H
R
O
U
G
H
P
H
O
N
E
C
A
B
L
E
P
L
U
G
G
E
D
I
N
T
O
"
R
X
/
T
X
"
P
O
R
T
O
N
C
C
M
.
1
.
U
S
E
R
E
D
W
I
R
E
S
F
O
R
+
2
4
V
D
C
A
N
D
B
L
A
C
K
F
O
R
R
E
T
.
2
.
J
U
M
P
E
R
W
1
S
H
O
U
L
D
B
E
I
N
.
M
A
K
E
S
U
R
E
T
H
A
T
J
U
M
P
E
R
W
4
O
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
B
O
A
R
D
I
S
O
U
T
.
4
)
.
T
B
2
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
T
O
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
A
N
E
L
S
'
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
A
N
D
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
T
O
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
R
1
W
1
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
T
B
1
+
2
4
V
R
E
T
T
B
2
4
8
5
B
4
8
5
A
S
I
G
G
N
D
C
O
M
A
L
M
C
O
M
T
B
L
J
9
R
S
-
4
8
5
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
I-20 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic Output Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
M
O
D
U
L
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
T
O
C
C
M
R
X
/
T
X
P
O
R
T
T
O
C
C
M
R
S
-
4
8
5
P
O
R
T
T
O
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
I-21 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
N
O
T
E
:
1
)
.
T
B
9
A
N
D
T
B
1
1
B
R
I
N
G
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
F
R
O
M
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
B
5
A
N
D
T
B
6
.
2
)
.
T
B
1
T
H
R
O
U
G
H
T
B
8
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
.
3
)
.
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
T
B
9
C
A
N
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
B
R
I
N
G
P
O
W
E
R
T
O
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
I
N
T
H
E
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
B
O
X
.
1
.
P
O
W
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
:
2
.
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
:
1
)
.
J
P
1
0
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
S
T
O
C
C
M
M
O
D
U
L
E
A
N
D
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
R
S
2
3
2
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
F
O
R
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
.
2
)
.
J
P
1
T
H
R
O
U
G
H
J
P
8
T
O
B
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
J
2
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
S
T
O
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
R
S
2
3
2
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
3
)
.
J
P
9
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
S
T
O
C
C
M
P
O
R
T
A
N
D
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
W
I
T
H
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
4
)
.
J
1
T
H
R
O
U
G
H
J
7
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
P
L
U
G
I
N
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
A
N
D
S
U
P
P
L
Y
T
H
E
M
W
I
T
H
+
2
4
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
A
N
D
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
5
)
.
T
B
1
0
T
O
B
E
U
S
E
D
T
O
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
T
O
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
P
A
N
E
L
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
A
N
D
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
I
E
S
T
O
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
1
.
U
S
E
R
E
D
W
I
R
E
S
F
O
R
+
2
4
V
D
C
A
N
D
B
L
A
C
K
F
O
R
R
E
T
.
2
.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
T
H
E
W
1
J
U
M
P
E
R
I
F
T
H
E
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
I
S
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
A
S
T
H
E
L
A
S
T
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
O
N
T
H
E
R
S
-
4
8
5
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
B
U
S
.
O
T
H
E
R
W
I
S
E
R
E
M
O
V
E
T
H
E
J
U
M
P
E
R
.
3
.
T
H
E
F
I
R
S
T
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
(
L
O
O
P
#
1
)
S
H
O
U
L
D
B
E
A
L
W
A
Y
S
O
N
T
H
E
F
A
R
R
I
G
H
T
A
N
D
I
N
T
E
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
T
O
J
P
1
A
N
D
T
B
1
.
A
L
L
C
O
N
S
E
C
U
T
I
V
E
R
X
/
T
X
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
S
H
O
U
L
D
B
E
P
L
U
G
G
E
D
F
R
O
M
R
I
G
H
T
T
O
L
E
F
T
S
T
A
R
T
I
N
G
F
R
O
M
T
H
E
F
I
R
S
T
R
X
/
T
X
.
(
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
N
U
M
B
E
R
I
S
A
S
S
O
C
I
A
T
E
D
W
I
T
H
L
O
O
P
N
U
M
B
E
R
)
.
W
1
J
1
J
3
J
4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
2
T
B
9
+
2
4
V
R
E
T
T
B
1
0
4
8
5
A
S
I
G
G
N
D
C
O
M
A
L
M
C
O
M
T
B
L
4
8
5
B
J
P
1
J
P
2
J
P
3
J
P
4
J
P
5
J
P
6
J
P
7
J
P
8
T
B
8
T
B
7
T
B
6
T
B
5
T
B
4
T
B
3
T
B
2
T
B
1
T
B
1
1
+
2
4
V
R
E
T
J
P
1
0
R
S
-
2
3
2
J
P
9
R
S
-
4
8
5
I-22 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
O
U
T
P
U
T
M
O
D
U
L
E
M
O
D
U
L
E
R
X
/
T
X
I-23 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device
NO/NC (Obsolete)
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
V
E
C
O
V
E
R
I
N
G
G
R
A
Y
O
R
A
N
G
E
B
R
O
W
N
W
H
I
T
E
T
O
C
A
T
H
O
D
E
T
O
A
N
O
D
E
T
O
R
E
M
O
T
E
L
E
D
T
O
R
E
M
O
V
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
N
/
O
E
O
L
B
N
W
H
E
O
L
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
3
U
L
L
A
B
E
L
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
S
B
K
R
D
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
1
N
.
O
.
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
M
A
N
U
A
L
P
U
L
L
S
T
A
T
I
O
N
W
A
T
E
R
F
L
O
W
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
3
E
O
L
E
O
L
N
O
T
E
S
1
.
R
E
D
A
N
D
B
L
A
C
K
W
I
I
R
E
S
A
R
E
N
O
N
-
P
O
L
E
R
I
Z
E
D
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
(
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
1
W
I
R
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
F
O
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
T
O
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
X
T
R
U
N
K
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
A
N
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S
.
2
.
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
L
I
N
E
F
O
R
R
E
M
O
T
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
.
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
M
U
S
T
B
E
I
N
T
H
E
S
A
M
E
R
O
O
M
A
S
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
B
L
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
I
N
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
,
W
I
T
H
A
L
L
W
I
R
I
N
G
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
I
N
C
O
N
D
U
I
T
,
A
N
D
A
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
L
E
N
G
T
H
O
F
1
5
0
F
T
.
3
.
E
O
L
R
E
S
I
S
T
O
R
:
8
2
0
O
H
M
.
5
W
A
T
T
(
F
E
N
W
A
L
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
0
6
-
1
2
9
0
2
5
-
0
0
1
)
4
.
T
O
R
E
M
O
T
E
L
E
D
(
F
E
N
W
A
L
P
A
R
T
N
O
.
7
0
-
4
1
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
)
O
B
S
E
R
V
E
P
O
L
A
R
I
T
Y
:
O
R
A
N
G
E
(
A
N
O
D
E
)
,
G
R
A
Y
(
C
A
T
H
O
D
E
)
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:
L
E
D
M
U
S
T
B
E
I
N
T
H
E
S
A
M
E
R
O
O
M
A
S
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
B
L
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
I
N
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
,
W
I
T
H
A
L
L
W
I
R
I
N
G
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
I
N
C
O
N
D
U
I
T
A
N
D
A
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
L
E
N
G
T
H
5
0
F
T
.
.
L
E
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
I
S
N
O
T
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
.
5
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
M
E
N
T
S
3
1
0
u
A
3
8
0
u
A
6
.
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
.

S
7
0
-
4
0
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
A
N
D
7
1
-
4
0
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
M
A
Y
B
E
M
I
X
E
D
O
N
T
H
E
S
A
M
E
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
X
T
R
U
N
K
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
,
B
U
T
S
H
A
L
L
N
O
T
E
X
C
E
E
D
2
5
5
T
O
T
A
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
P
E
R
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
,
2
0
4
0
P
E
R
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
7
.
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
P
U
L
E
S
R
A
T
E
:
N
O
R
M
A
L
:
9
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
A
L
A
R
M
:
2
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
:
N
O
L
E
D
P
U
L
S
I
N
G
8
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
S
Y
S
T
E
M
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
M
A
N
U
A
L
F
O
R
A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
B
L
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
I
N
P
U
T
D
E
V
I
C
E
.
9
.
W
I
R
I
N
G
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
S
H
O
W
N
F
O
R
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
2
-
0
0
X
T
H
R
U
7
0
-
4
0
7
0
0
4
-
0
0
X
.
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
A
L
A
R
M
C
A
T
.
N
O
.
D
E
S
C
R
I
P
T
I
O
N
-
0
0
0
N
O
R
M
A
L
L
Y
O
P
E
N
-
0
0
1
N
O
R
M
A
L
L
Y
C
L
O
S
E
D
F
O
R
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
O
R
Y
U
S
E
O
N
L
Y
I-24 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device
(Obsolete)
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
V
E
C
O
V
E
R
I
N
G
U
L
L
A
B
E
L
R
D
B
K
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
S
1
&
9
N
O
T
E
S
1
.
R
E
D
A
N
D
B
L
A
C
K
W
I
I
R
E
S
A
R
E
N
O
N
-
P
O
L
E
R
I
Z
E
D
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
R
X
/
T
X
(
C
A
T
.
N
u
m
b
e
r
3
0
-
4
0
2
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
&
7
6
-
1
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
1
)
W
I
R
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
F
O
R
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
T
O
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
X
T
R
U
N
K
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
A
N
D
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S
.
2
.
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
A
R
E
N
O
T
S
U
P
E
R
V
I
S
E
D
.
R
A
T
I
N
G
:
2
A
,
3
0
V
D
C
(
R
E
S
I
S
T
I
V
E
)
.
6
A
,
1
2
0
V
A
C
(
R
E
S
I
S
T
I
V
E
)
3
.
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
M
E
N
T
S
:
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
:
3
2
5
u
A
4
.
5
.
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
P
U
L
S
E
R
A
T
E
:
R
E
L
A
Y
R
E
S
E
T
(
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
)
:
9
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
R
E
L
A
Y
S
E
T
:
2
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
S
T
A
T
E
:
N
O
L
E
D
P
U
L
S
I
N
G
6
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
S
Y
S
T
E
M
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
M
A
N
U
A
L
F
O
R
A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
A
B
L
E
R
E
L
A
Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
7
.
M
O
U
N
T
S
I
N
4

S
Q
U
A
R
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
B
O
X
.
8
.
M
U
S
T
B
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
I
N
A
U
.
L
.
L
I
S
T
E
D
G
A
N
G
B
O
X
.
.
9
.
W
I
R
I
N
G
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
S
H
O
W
N
F
O
R
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
2
-
0
0
0
T
H
R
U
7
0
-
4
0
8
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
.
S
M
A
R
T
D
E
T
E
C
T
O
R
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
N
O
.

S
7
0
-
4
0
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
A
N
D
7
1
-
4
0
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
M
A
Y
B
E
M
I
X
E
D
O
N
T
H
E
S
A
M
E
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
X
T
R
U
N
K
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
,
B
U
T
S
H
A
L
L
N
O
T
E
X
C
E
E
D
2
5
5
T
O
T
A
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
S
P
E
R
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
,
2
0
4
0
P
E
R
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
C
A
U
T
I
O
N
:

L
E
D
(
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
5
)
F
I
E
L
D
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
N
.
C
.
C
O
M
.
N
.
O
.
B
R
O
W
N
(
N
/
C
)
O
R
A
N
G
E
(
C
O
M
)
W
H
I
T
E
(
N
/
O
)
S
E
E
N
O
T
E
2
I-25 76-100016-001 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device
NO/NC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
C
P
C
P
C
P
C
(
+
)
(
-
)
(
+
)
(
-
)
8
A
S
W
B
S
W
(
+
)
L
E
D
(
-
)
L
E
D
R
e
m
o
t
e
L
E
D
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
P
C
L
i
n
e
I
n
P
C
L
i
n
e
O
u
t
E
O
L
(
L
i
s
t
e
d
1
0
K
R
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
)
W
T
y
p
i
c
a
l
N
.
O
.
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g
D
e
v
i
c
e
s
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
s
:
1
,
2
,
a
n
d
4
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
3
T
y
p
i
c
a
l
N
.
C
.
S
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
o
r
y
D
e
v
i
c
e
s
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
C
P
C
P
C
P
C
(
+
)
(
-
)
(
+
)
(
-
)
8
A
S
W
B
S
W
(
+
)
L
E
D
(
-
)
L
E
D
E
O
L
(
L
i
s
t
e
d
1
0
K
R
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
)
W
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
3
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
7
A
I
,
N
/
O
A
I
,
N
/
C
N
O
T
E
S
1
.
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

2
5

r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

p
e
r

w
i
r
e

f
o
r
i
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
.


F
o
r

a

t
o
t
a
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

w
i
r
i
n
g
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

o
f

5
0

m
a
x
.
2
.
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
s

w
i
r
i
n
g

f
r
o
m
#
1
8

A
W
G

(
0
.
7
5

m
m
2
)

t
o

#
1
4

A
W
G

(
1
.
5
m
m
2
)
3
.
R
e
f
e
r

t
o

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

P
a
n
e
l

M
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r
a
d
d
r
e
s
s
a
b
l
e

l
o
o
p

w
i
r
i
n
g

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
.
4
.
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

1
0

V
D
C

@

1

m
A
.
5
.
T
h
i
s

m
o
d
u
l
e

w
i
l
l

n
o
t

s
u
p
p
o
r
t

2
-
w
i
r
e
s
m
o
k
e

d
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
s
.
6
.
N
/
O

i
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

d
e
v
i
c
e

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

i
s

N
F
P
A
C
l
a
s
s

B
/
S
t
y
l
e

B
.
7
.
R
a
t
i
n
g

o
n

L
E
D

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
:

2
6

V
D
C

M
a
x
.

7
m
A

M
a
x
.


I
f

n
o
t

u
s
e
d

l
e
a
v
e

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
o
p
e
n

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
.
8
.
A
l
l

w
i
r
i
n
g

i
s

p
o
w
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
e
d

a
n
d

s
u
p
e
r
-
v
i
s
e
d
.
9
.
T
h
e

A
I
,

N
/
C

D
e
v
i
c
e

i
s

i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d

f
o
r

u
s
e
w
i
t
h
i
n

t
h
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

p
r
o
v
i
d
i
n
g
t
h
e

n
o
r
m
a
l
l
y

c
l
o
s
e
d

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
.
1
0
.
T
h
e

i
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

d
e
v
i
c
e

a
n
d

r
e
m
o
t
e

L
E
D
a
n
n
u
n
c
i
a
t
o
r

(
i
f

u
s
e
d
)

m
u
s
t

b
e

l
o
c
a
t
e
d

i
n
t
h
e

s
a
m
e

r
o
o
m

a
s

t
h
e

A
I
.
1
1
.
U
s
e

L
i
s
t
e
d

1
0
K

O
h
m

e
n
d
-
o
f
-
l
i
n
e

r
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
,
P
/
N

7
0
-
4
1
1
0
0
1
-
0
0
5
.
I-26 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device
DRAWING No.
New Design
REVISION
-
SHEET
1 of 1
M O D E L A O
I N S T R U C T I O N S
S E E I N S T A L L A T I O N
C A T . N O . 7 0 - 4 0 8 0 0 4 - 0 0 1
S m a r t O n e
T M
F O R S E R V I C E S E N D T O :
K I D D E - F E N W A L , I N C .
4 0 0 M A I N S T .
A S H L A N D , M A 0 1 7 2 1
D A T E O F M A N U F A C T U R E :
M A X . I N S T A L L . T E M P . 1 2 0 F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 6 - 2 3 5 5 7 7 - 0 0 1
P
C
P
C
P
C
P
C
(
+
)
(
-
)
(
+
)
(
-
)
N
/
C
C
O
M
N
/
O
P
C
L
i
n
e
I
n
(
+
)
(
-
)
(
+
)
(
-
)
P
C
L
i
n
e
O
u
t
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
3
N
/
O
C
O
M
N
/
C
F
i
e
l
d
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
T E R M I N A L S 5 - 7 A R E P O W E R L I M I T E D
T E R M I N A L S 1 - 4 A R E P O W E R L I M I T E D
7
6 5
S
e
e
N
o
t
e
3
N
O
T
E
S
1
.
A
O

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

i
n

t
h
e

s
a
m
e
r
o
o
m

a
s

t
h
e

d
e
v
i
c
e

i
t

i
s

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

.
2
.
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
s

w
i
r
i
n
g
f
r
o
m

#
1
8

A
W
G

(
0
.
7
5

m
m
2
)

t
o

#
1
4
A
W
G

(
1
.
5

m
m
2
)
3
.
R
e
f
e
r

t
o

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

P
a
n
e
l

M
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r
a
d
d
r
e
s
s
a
b
l
e

l
o
o
p

w
i
r
i
n
g

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
-
t
i
o
n
.
4
.
P
C

L
i
n
e

w
i
r
i
n
g

i
s

p
o
w
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
e
d

a
n
d
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
e
d
.
J-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX J
PEGASYS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
J-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the
capability for peer-to-peer communication between
PEGAsys fire/suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC
mounts as a daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Con-
trol Module (CCM). Up to thirty-two (32) nodes may be
networked to form groups. Groups are numbered into logi-
cal groupings that delineate the extended coverage area
and simplify programming.
Note: PEGAsys SL/ML control units may be networked
with PEGAsys LV Control Units
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
D
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
TB3
B2IA2
TB4
B2NA2
TB2
B1NA1
TB1
B1IA1
U11
C26
U16
1
U17
1
RV2
RV1
RV3
R26
K1
U18
1
U20
1
R
2
1
U21
1
R41
Q2
R40
Q3
C
1
0
R
4
3
R
4
2
R18 U6
1
U14
1
C8
R7
Q4
C9
U19 1
U15
1
Q1
C7
R1
R44
R17
R
V
1
1
R
2
4
R
V
1
2
E
8
R
V
1
0 RV8 RV6
E
4
E
7
R
2
5
R
5
R
6
R20
R22
RV5
RV4
E
3
E
2
E
5
E
6
R
4
R
3
R36
RV9
RV7
K2
K4
R
2
3
CR2
K3
CR1
U5
1
C
1
8
R
1
3
R
2
U4
1
U8
1
R29
R38
C24
R19
C17
+
R27
U9
1
R32
R12
U10
1
R28
C22
C16
C15
R31
C25 C
1
R
1
5
R
3
3
R34
C14
R
1
4
U2
1
C
2
3
U7
1
C20
+
C
2
E
1
C11
C5
C3 +
C4
+
R45
U13
1
R46
C27
U12
1
C12
C
R
3
Y1
TP2
+5
TP6
I2
TP4
N1
TP5
N2
TP3
I1
U3
1
C13
R10
TP1
GND
J1 DS2
N1
DS4
N2
DS3
I2
DS1
I1
Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC)
Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e.,
equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated
network group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network
group 0. When an event occurs at a node, notification of
the particular alarm, trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered
to each of the other nodes on the network in the form of a
message.
J-2 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING
J-2.1 Overview
Each node can be configured independently using any of
the three methods described in the following paragraphs.
The configuration process is dealt with in more detail in
the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manu-
als (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015), which should be referred to.
Note: It is not possible to download configuration infor-
mation to all the NICs on a network simultaneously.
Each NIC (node) must be configured indepen-
dently.
The operator can set network configuration options on the
PEGAsys in three ways:
Via the keypad on the Central Control Module.
Via PCS.
Via a dumb terminal.
Below are the network options which can be configured
for each node and are stored in that panel's memory. Para-
graphs detailing each option follow:
Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4),
or Redundant Channel (Style 7).
Node number: 0 to 32.
Network group number: 0 to 32.
Processing of network RESET messages: En-
abled/Disabled.
Processing of network SILENCE messages: En-
abled/Disabled.
Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled.
Time resynchronization (resynch) period.
Central Station.
J-2.1.1 NETWORK STYLE
Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled
(Style 7), or either one of the channels can be disabled
(Style 4). These data channels transmit network informa-
tion from one node to the next, or bi-directionally if nodes
are connected on either side of the transmitting node. In
Style 7 configuration, data transfer is redundant so that if
there is a failure on one channel, or its cable, the other
channel will maintain communications.
J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0
(the default) means that the node does not participate in
any network activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means
that the node actively participates in all pre-configured net-
work activity.
J-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER
ASSIGNMENT
Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node
assigned to network group 0 receives and processes mes-
sages received from all nodes only if configured to Log All
Events." A node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will pro-
cess only those messages from nodes in the same net-
work group unless configured to Log All (Network) groups."
J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to net-
work group 0, it can be reset from any node on the net-
work.
J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to net-
work group 0, it can be silenced from any node on the net-
work.
J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling Log All Events causes all network events to be
logged at this node. This includes the receipt of an AC-
KNOWLEDGE from a button on a remote node. Disabling
will result in logging events only in its own (non-zero) group.
J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD
(SET IN MINUTES)
A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the net-
work at intervals determined by the resynch period. If a node
does not receive a resynchronization message during this
interval, it uses its network connection to ask for the time, or
uses its own locally stored time if its query does not result in
a resynch message.
3. SET
1. TIME:DATE
2. PRINTER
3. DEVICES
7. NETWORK
4. PROGRAMMING
7. CLEAR EVENTS
8.RESYNCH NETWORK
2. NODE NUMBER
1. STYLE
3. GROUP
4. ADD/RMV NODES
5. RESET EVENT
6. SILENCE EVENTS
9. ISOLATE
7. LOG EVENTS
CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE
NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: STAND ALONE
GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: NOT GROUPD
ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __
ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET
ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE
1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE
8. RESYNC PERIOD SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN
LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS
CLEARS ALL EVENTS INITIATED FROM REMOTE NODES
AND REQUESTS A RETRANSMISSION OF ALL EXISTING
EVENTS FROM ALL NODES
Figure J-2. Network Menu
J-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
J-2.1.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
A node can be configured as a central station if that node is
properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104.
Central Station configuration automatically forces that node
to Log All Events and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the
CCM, is configured to activate on any alarm on any node
in the network.
J-2.2 Configuring Networking Options
via the Display/Keypad
Configuration can be performed through the system menus
which are accessible using the panels built-in membrane
keypad and the LCD display panel. The software will ini-
tially use default values, with networking style set to None
until changed by the operator.
J-2.2 PEGAsys Panel Network Menus
The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded
to accommodate network configuration. All of the network
options listed in Paragraph J-2.1 are configured via the
front panel membrane keypad. In addition, the menu pro-
vides the ability to add or remove individual or groups of
nodes to/from the network. The additions to the PEGAsys
menu structure are diagramed in Figure J-2.
J-2.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCS
Configuration of all CCM parameters, including network
parameters, can be accomplished using PCS. The soft-
ware will initially use default values, with networking Style
set to None until changed by an operator.
See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for details.
J-2.4 Configuring Networking Options
via a Dumb Terminal
Network configuration can be performed through use of
the system menus using a dumb terminal attached to
the serial PC Port. The software will initially use default
values, with networking style set to None until changed
by an operator.
Note: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm condi-
tion in effect.
J-3 OPERATION
Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to com-
municate differently depending on:
Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to
groups 1 through 32.
Whether they are communicating with other panels in
their local group, or with panels in a remote group.
Table J-1 summarizes these relationships. In more detail:
A node which receives the network message from an-
other node in the same non-zero group will process
the network message appropriately, depending on its
own installed program. The ACKNOWLEDGE func-
tion will be automatic, the SILENCE and RESET func-
tions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration
Software (PCS), or by using the panels membrane
keypad and LCD display panel.
A node in a different non-zero network group config-
ured to log all events will process network message(s)
from any node in the entire network, depending on its
own installed program. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic,
however SILENCE and RESET functions must be en-
abled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by
using the panels membrane keypad and LCD display
panel.
A node in network group zero, the default group, will
not be recognized by any other nodes in network group
zero for functions other than receiving messages un-
less it is configured to log all events in PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS).
n o i t a c o L e d o N e t o m e R K C A E C N E L I S T E S E R S T R / C O E / S T N E V E G O L
: e t o N f i s e d o n e t o m e r m o r f s t n e v e d n a s e h s u p n o t t u b t p e c c a l l i w t i , p u o r g o r e z - n o n a n i s i e d o n a f I
0 p u o r g n i s e d o n l l A L L , E S L , E R L
p u o r g e m a s n i s e d o n l l A s e Y E S E R s e Y
s p u o r g t n e r e f f i d n i s e d o n l l A L L , E S L , E R L
: e t o N d e r u g i f n o c f i s e d o n e t o m e r m o r f s t n e v e d n a s e h s u p n o t t u b t p e c c a l l i w t i , 0 p u o r g n i s i e d o n a f I
: w o l e b n w o h s s a
s p u o r g l l a n i s e d o n l l A L L , E S L , E R L
" . s p u o r G l l A g o L " o t d e r u g i f n o c s i e d o n f I : L
. e l b a n E E C N E L I S e t o m e r r o f d e r u g i f n o c s i e d o n f I : E S
e l b a n E T E S E R e t o m e r r o f d e r u g i f n o c s i e d o n f I : E R
Table J-1. Network Configuration Table
J-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships.
Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via
Network Menu.
J-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This paragraph describes the hardware used to implement
the PEGAsys Network:
Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network Wiring
J-4.1 Central Control Module CPU Board
The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the origi-
nal CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a
daughter board. This modification has no effect on normal
operation of the PEGAsys panel or system.
J-4.2 Network Interface Card (NIC)
The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-com-
munication between network nodes. The network commu-
nication channels are EIA-485 bus lines. Each node uses
one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the following functions:
Dual-Channel Support
Messaging
Repeater
Fail Safe
Isolation
TA1
ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM
TA2
NON-ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM
Hardware
Repeater
Logic
Rx/Tx Selection
Logic
1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE
CARD (NIC)
To CCM CPU
TB2
TB1
Rx out Rx out
Tx in Tx in
Driver
Enable
Driver
Enable
RTS Rx Tx
Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram
(Shown with Power to NIC Lost)
J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT
The NIC supports operation of Style 4 or Style 7 channels.
Under normal operation with Style 7, network communica-
tion is divided between the two channels. In case of a short
circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either
channel by itself can execute all network communications,
although somewhat more slowly than if both channels are
in operation.
J-4.2.2 MESSAGING
When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel,
the data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out
to the bus for receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not
transmitting data, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and
converts it to a form readable by the nodes software. Data
communication will be configured on the NICs UART as 8
bits, no parity, 1 stop bit (8-N-1) and 9600 baud. The NIC
will either transmit locally-produced data or receive and
retransmit bus activity as a repeater.
J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)
The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information
as it moves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater func-
tion is implemented completely in hardware; no software
is needed to control this process. The transceivers trans-
mit and receive switching (in half-duplex mode) is also per-
formed automatically by hardware.
J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE
If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a
normally closed (NC) relay which maintains the communi-
cations integrity of the network. When the NIC loses power,
the relay passes the network signals directly through the
board. While the node without power will not participate in
networking, this pass-through function allows all other net-
work nodes to function normally while providing the proper
trouble indications.
J-4.2.5 ISOLATION
One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485
transceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded
RS-485 transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any
two nodes are physically disconnected, eliminating the
possibility of ground-loop current, while retaining the abil-
ity to detect ground faults.
J-4.3 Network Wiring
The panels are networked by attaching two twisted,
unshielded-pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The
node-to-node wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft.
and must be AWG 18 or heavier gauge. Under adverse
conditions (for example, high electrical noise) unshielded,
twisted pairs in conduit may be required. Connect panels
together as shown in Figure J-4.
J-5 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
B1IA1 B2IA2 B1NA1 B2NA2
NETWORK
INTERFACE
CARD
CCM CPU BOARD
PEGAsys PANEL PEGAsys PANEL
B1IA1 B2IA2 B1NA1 B2NA2
NETWORK
INTERFACE
CARD
CCM CPU BOARD
Channel 1
Channel 2
Note A
Note B
Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM.
Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating.
Figure J-4. Network Wiring
J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT
No maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the mod-
ule should be returned to the factory for repair or replace-
ment.
J-6 PARTS LIST
The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of
the following:
n o i t p i r c s e D r e b m u N t r a P
) C I N ( d r a C e c a f r e t n I k r o w t e N 0 0 5 - 6 3 0 0 0 2 - 4 7
. n i - , f f o d n a t S n o l y N n i - p a n S 1 0 0 - 2 4 1 8 1 1 - 6 0
, f f o d n a t S s s a r B s s e l d a e h T 2 3 - 8
d e t a l p l e k c i N
1 0 0 - 3 4 1 8 1 1 - 6 0
. n i - 1 x 2 3 - 8
r e h s a W h t i w w e r c S
0 3 0 - 6 1 1 0 5 2 - 6 0
t e e h S n o i t a l l a t s n I 1 0 0 - 8 4 8 5 3 2 - 6 0
J-7 INSTALLATION
The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board.
After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together
using twisted, unshielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier.
For full Style-7 operation, two unshielded, twisted pair cables
must connect each pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4.
Single-channel operation (using only one twisted pair cable
between NICs) is possible and provides Style 4 operation.
With single-channel operation, an open circuit on any net-
work wire will effectively break the network into two sepa-
rate peer-to-peer networks, both functional and both
reporting troubles.
J-7.1 NIC Installation
CAUTION
!
PEGAsys system installation applications
require that when a NIC is installed, pre-
discharge and release-state activation, as well
as abort-state activation are limited to the
originating fire-alarm control panel.
Note: Determine whether you have a newer or older
CCM; a new CCM can be recognized by a single-
line 20 pin header on the top edge on right side of
board. If the networking upgrade is for an older
system, the new CCM and Network Interface Card
(NIC) will be separate. First replace the old CCM
with the new CCM and then install the NIC. See
following instructions for NIC installation.
CAUTION
!
Many electronic components are subject to
damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD).
These components are not to be removed from
their protective wrappings until they are to be
installed in their respective equipment
locations, and then only by personnel
connected to earth ground.
Note: For proper network configuration it is necessary
to use Version 7.X (or later) of PCS. For complete
information on this aspect of installation, see the
PEGAsys Configuration Software user's manuals
(P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). As of this date, Ver-
sion 8.X (or later) of PCS is required for proper con-
figuration.
J-7.2 Required Tools
Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform
removal and installation.
Small flat-blade screwdriver.
6" flat-blade screwdriver.
No. 2 cross-head screwdriver.
Wire striper.
Small needle nose pliers.
Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection.
IC chip extraction tool.
J-7.3 Central Control Module
The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate net-
work interface card; some existing panels can be retrofit-
ted with a network interface card. Following are instructions
both for replacement of complete CCM modules, and for
installing a NIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM
module consists of both the CPU panel and its attached
LCD display and keypad assembly.
J-6 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
J-7.4 Removing and Replacing a Complete CCM
Module
The old CCM module can be removed as a whole and re-
placed with a new module. The following provides the pro-
cedure for removing and replacing a complete CCM module.
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS). For the proper proce-
dure, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS)
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
2. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version
compatible with PEGAsys networking.
3. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.
4. Remove power from the control unit; make sure that
the chassis remains grounded.
5. Disconnect cables from the RS-485 port, the RX/TX port,
and the PC port. Make note of each wire and cable
connection for use during reassembly
6. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM.
7. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the
CCM assembly in place.
8. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet.
9. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect
for physical damage. If undamaged, proceed to Step
10.
10. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal, mak-
ing sure that each wire and cable is properly recon-
nected.
11. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the
network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2.
J-7.5 Installing an NIC in an existing CCM Module
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS soft-
ware.
2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.
3. Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis
remains grounded.
4. Remove four nylon screws holding membrane keypad
and remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its
connector.
5. Remove the six threaded spacers that secure the dis-
play electronics board and lift board out. Do not dis-
connect boardlet it hang down. Data and power lines
will remain connected.
6. Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included
with the NIC into the holes shown in Figure J-5.
7. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and
onto the plastic standoffs.
8. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and
spacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board
and screw will go through to the panel.
9. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the
six threaded spacers.
10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the
four screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are prop-
erly aligned.
11. Attach network wiring as previously described.
12. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the
network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2.
PORT
PC
PORT
PRINT
PORT
DISP
R
X
/
T
X
P
O
R
T
R
S
-
4
8
5
P
O
R
T
INSERT PLASTIC
STANDOFFS HERE
20-PIN RECEPTACLE
FOR NIC
DISPLAY PORT
PRINT PORT
P.C. PORT
RS-485 PORT
RX/TX PORT
LONG SCREW
AND SPACER
THROUGH HERE
Figure J-5. CCM Board Showing
NIC Attachment Points
J-7.6 Replacing Firmware Chips
Refer to the instructions in the applicable PEGAsys Firm-
ware Upgrade Kit. All networked control units must have
the same version of CCM Firmware.
J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via
the CCM board. No other power connections are required.
J-9 TESTING
Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the
NIC is installed. No local test functions exist. For more
information on testing the NIC and the network, see the
PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) User's Manual.
J-10 SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage 24 Vdc
Supervisory Current 50 mA maximum
Alarm Current 50 mA maximum
K-1 January 2002 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX K
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE
K-1 INTRODUCTION
The SmartOne

Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM)

is an intelligent field device that contains its own micropro-
cessor, 4K of memory and all necessary electronics to pro-
vide standard notification or audio output. Connection is via
the SmartOne

compatible control panels power/communi-
cation line. This component is a UL Listed

field device.
The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware
to support notification appliances and NFPA Class B, Style
Y or Class A, Style Z operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/
auxiliary notification appliance switch and jumper selec-
tions, and NFPA operation Class A and Class B terminal
selections.
Note: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing
device and is not compatible with solenoids.
For installation details and complete electrical and mechani-
cal specifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet
(P/N 06-235717-001).
A B B A
- + - + + - - +
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
DEVICE
ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ AUX./AUDIO MODE
SETTINGS
PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
_ _ _ _
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
ADDRESS #
SETTINGS
AUDIO
P1=1&2
MODE
S1=3 ON
AUX. IN
+ - + -
TROUBLE
CKT.
-
OUTPUT CKT.
- + +
AUX./AUDIO MODE
AUXILIARY
MODE
P1=2&3
S1=1&2 ON
PC LINE
A B A B
DEVICE
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
FM
APPROVED
R L
U
TM
Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel
K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION
As with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is done via
the Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or
the PEGAsys control panel menu/keypad, as described in
Chapter 2 of this manual. Set the ASM for audio mode,
install a 47K resistor on the output circuit, and install a
4.7K resistor on the trouble circuit when addressing with
the handheld programmer.
Module-programmable parameters include owners-location
message, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode
and silence. The programming process is described in
PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals
(P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
Addressing and registration into the PEGAsys system is
described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-paragraphs) of this
manual. Registration of the module at the PEGAsys panel
is mandatory to ensure proper operation.
K-3 OPERATION
Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no
maintenance. The module's 24 Vdc or 25/70 Vac modes
can be changed from the factory defaults using switch S1
and jumper P1 (see Figure K-1).
K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM)
provides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for con-
nection to either 24 Vdc audible/visual notification signal-
ing devices or 25/70.7 V RMS speakers. The module
provides continuous internal supervision of:
Alarm contact position.
Connections to loop voltage and communications.
Internal power supply.
Auxiliary power supply connections and status.
Memory status.
The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will
not actuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault,
open, short or a relay contact failure, the device will trans-
mit a specific trouble status.
A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the out-
put circuit status by a two second (active) or nine second
(normal) flash interval. A trouble condition inhibits the sta-
tus LED completely.
K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled
component, and is not field serviceable. Little or no main-
tenance is required.
Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of
the PEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and
Corrective Maintenance, for particulars. In the event of a
failure, the module should be replaced.
For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM Instal-
lation data sheet.
K-2 January 2002 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
K-6 PARTS LIST
The following parts are required for installation and opera-
tion. All are supplied with the ASM.
Addressable Signal/Sounder Module:
P/N 70-200200-001
Front Cover Plate:
P/N 06235714-001
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W:
P/N 06-250166-452
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W:
P/N 06-250166-596
Installation Data Sheet: P/N 06-235717-001
K-7 INSTALLATION
Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction
Data Sheet.
K-7.1 Installation Notes
The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor
use and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16"
electrical box, or 4-inch square 2-1/8-inch deep box. The
module terminal block will accept #12, #14, #16 and #18
AWG wire (4.0 mm
2
, 2.5 mm
2
, 1.5 mm
2
and

1.0 mm
2
re-
spectively). Size #18 AWG is the minimum requirement.
The use of solid wire and an extension ring is recom-
mended.
Strip -inch from the ends of all wires that connect to the
terminal block of the module.
CAUTION
!
Exposing more than -inch of wire may cause
a ground fault. Exposing less than -inch of
wire may result in a faulty connection.
1/4 (6.4mm) NTS
Figure K-2. -Inch Strip
Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifi-
cations. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.
Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Opera-
tion and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring
specifications.
Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and
supervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR
or FPLP cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical
Code (NEC).
The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTH-
ERS-POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is
connected to a non-power limited supply source.
If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not
power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and
the trouble circuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all
three circuits are power limited.
Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the au-
dio equipment. Power limited or non-power limited ampli-
fier outputs are available.
K-7.2 Output Circuit Characteristics
Output Circuit Rating
2.0 A max. @ 30.0 Vdc
20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS
20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS
Maximum Line Resistances
(with 12 AWG wire)
d a o L
) s p m a (
e c n a t s i s e R
) s m h o (
h t g n e L
* ) t e e f (
2 2 . 0 0 . 0 2 k 0 . 2 1
5 5 . 0 0 . 8 k 0 . 5
0 0 . 1 0 . 4 k 5 . 2
0 5 . 1 7 . 2 k 6 . 0
0 0 . 2 0 . 2 k 2 . 1
*Note: Consider total line lengths from module to field and
return.
K-3 January 2002 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
NOTES:
1. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (1.0 mm
2
) to #12 AWG (4.0 mm
2
). Wires determine electrical box
depth.
2. Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification.
3. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised.
4. If auxiliary power source is non-power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are non-
power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are power limited.
5. All circuits are supervised.
6. Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment.
Figure K-3. Installation Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT CKT.
OPEN FOR
TROUBLE CONTACT
NORMAL STATUS
PC LINE
AUX. IN
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE
25/70.7 VAC AUDIO
AMPLIFIER LISTED FOR
FIRE PROTECTIVE
REGULATED SUPPLY OR
SUPPLY
OUT
SEE
NOTE 6
+
+
+
+ + -
-
-
- -
B A
ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL
RESISTOR POSITION.
EXAMPLE OF STYLE Y
(CLASS B) SHOWING THE
RESISTOR
RESISTOR POSITION.
ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL
(CLASS A) SHOWING THE
EXAMPLE OF STYLE Z
4.7K, 1/2W
EOL RESISTOR
LISTED
LISTED
EOL
RESISTOR
47K, 1/2W
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LMTD.
LISTED
47K, 1/2W EOL
CKT.
TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT.
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
ADDRESS #
A B
DEVICE
_ _ _ _
PC LINE
IN
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
SEE NOTE 3
OUT
PC LINE
-
+
+
-
1 2 3
AND SWITCH S1
FROM 2-3
SET P1 JUMPER
FOR 24VDC MODE
ON ON OFF
ON
SET P1 JUMPER
AND SWITCH S1
FROM 1-2
1 2 3
OFF OFF
FOR AUDIO MODE
SEE NOTE 4
LISTED COMPATIBLE
24VDC OR 25/70.7VAC
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES
+
-
SIGNALING SYSTEMS
VERIFY SWITCH AND
JUMPER SETTINGS
AND TEST PER
NFPA 72
AUX./AUDIO MODE
SETTINGS
+ -
+ -
K-4 January 2002 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
L-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX L
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE
AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE
L-1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the information necessary to support
the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM)
(Figure L-1), P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Mod-
ule (RDM) (Figure L-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules
function as remote addressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys
and mimic the main control panels LCD and LED front dis-
plays. Additionally, the RDCM contains system control
switches and a tactile response numeric keypad. These con-
trols match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM does not permit
operation of the control features (operation is read only).
The RDCM is key and password secured with the password
needed being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.
SYSTEM
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
3
8
AC POWER
ALARM
PRE-ALARM
6
1
7
2
SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM TROUBLE
System Status Display
SILENCE
9
4
0
5
SILENCE
SCROLL
R
Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel
PRE-ALARM
ALARM
AC POWER
R
SILENCE
System Status Display
SYSTEM TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
SCROLL
Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel
Module installers must be fully factory trained in all as-
pects of the PEGAsys system. Additional supporting docu-
mentation is also contained in this manual and in the
PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals, P/Ns
76-014 and 76-015.
L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via
an RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/unshielded
wire) in a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting
up to fifteen (15) RDCM display/control and sixteen (16)
RDM display only modules. The installation can be in any
combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long as the maxi-
mum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The
RDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and
LCD display, provides remote access to the system and, if
programmed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu op-
tions via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel func-
tion and numeric keys.
Remote, non-resetable power is required and can be pro-
vided by the control panel PSU or a separate UL Listed
supply for fire alarm application. In each instance, remote
power is supervised by the RDCM and RDM with failure
displayed locally and at the control panel. The units also
contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows the buzzer
contained in the control panel.
Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be
programmed as the master unit to control the system un-
der alarm or fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (non-
master) unit will grant that module exclusive control over
the system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, at-
tempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout
display message on the module attempting the interrupt.
This acts to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circum-
stances, the master will be granted immediate system con-
trol.
L-2.1 Operator Interface
All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel as-
sembly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for
processing.
The RDCM operator-interface function keys are:
Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and
silence all local buzzers.
Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowl-
edge.
Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions.
Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.
Note: Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys
menu.
L-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the pass-
word and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the
alphanumeric keypad:
09: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys
menus.
Backspace: Used to exit menu and correct entries.
Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus.
Note: Operation of above keys will be hereinafter de-
scribed.
The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for
monitoring the PEGAsys and remote modules are:
Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition.
Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition.
Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have
been silenced after Acknowledge.
Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition.
Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC
power.
Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector
is in pre-alarm condition.
CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to
the installer only. Indicates RDCM/RDM proces-
sor has failed to initialize.
LED colors used to represent indications are:
Red: Alarm.
Green: Power-on.
Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory
and pre-alarm.
The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll
key, but does not provide the other function keys nor an
operable keypad.
L-2.2 Interconnection
The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which
supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys con-
trol panel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will
support up to fifteen (15) RDCMs and sixteen (16) RDMs in
any combination not exceeding the maximum for each
module.
L-2.3 Addressing
Address selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexa-
decimal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed
circuit board. See Figure L-4.
Table L-1. Address Switch Settings
h c t i w S
g n i t t e S
M C D R / M D R
s s e r d d A
h c t i w S
g n i t t e S
M C D R / M D R
s s e r d d A
1 1 0 M C D R r o M D R 9 9 0 M C D R r o M D R
2 2 0 M C D R r o M D R A 0 1 M C D R r o M D R
3 3 0 M C D R r o M D R B 1 1 M C D R r o M D R
4 4 0 M C D R r o M D R C 2 1 M C D R r o M D R
5 5 0 M C D R r o M D R D 3 1 M C D R r o M D R
6 6 0 M C D R r o M D R E 4 1 M C D R r o M D R
7 7 0 M C D R r o M D R F 5 1 M C D R r o M D R
8 8 0 M C D R r o M D R 0 6 1 M D R
L-3 OPERATION
Before proceeding with operations, become totally famil-
iar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
manual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode,
Active Supervisory Mode and Active Trouble Mode. Be sure
to note differences between latching and non-latching Ac-
tive Alarm Modes.
For RX/TX loop input devices: To set either latching or
non-latching, refer to the PCS Operations chapter in the
PEGAsys Configuration Software manual.
Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys Panel, RDM, RDCM(s)
TWISTED UNSHIELDED CABLE
RDCM/RDM
ASSEMBLY
PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR
NOTES:
1. ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED.
2. REMOVE JUMPER W2 FROM DCMAND ALL INTERMEDIATE REMOTE DISPLAYS. INSTALL W2 ON LAST REMOTE DISPLAY ONLY.
3. IF SHIELDED CABLE, CONNECT SHIELD TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND.
POWER SUPPLY
DCM ASSEMBLY
TB1
PINS
AUX.
+
24V
-
5
6
TB1 PINS
IN
1
8
7
2
ASSEMBLY
RDCM/RDM
TIED TOGETHER WHEN
USING THE PANELS
PINS 3 & 4 ARE
POWER SUPPLY
TB1 PINS
OUT
6 5
4
3
IN
7
8
3
REMOTE
DEVICES
UP TO 31
TB1 PINS
6
1
2
4
5
-
+
AUX. SUPPLY
(IF REQ'D.)
24V
TO TROUBLE
CONTACTS
CLOSED = NORMAL
OPERATION
PEGAsys
L-3 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these
examples, assume the device to be manual release, ad-
dress 1004).
In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99
PEGASYS
In practice, the actual local time and date will be shown.
When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the
display will show:
1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
L-3.1 Switch Functions
The switch functions are listed in sequence of use:
L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE
All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF or SU-
PERVISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged
by operation of this switch. Multiple alarms must be indi-
vidually acknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default
to individual acknowledge, but may be programmed to glo-
bal acknowledge by accessing the SET" menu from the
PEGAsys or any RDCM.
The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the
PEGAsys causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady
mode, and the buzzer to silence.
The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all re-
mote RDCM/RDM buzzers.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all
other RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive con-
trol over the system for 30 seconds. Under these condi-
tions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a
lockout display message (see Paragraph L-3.1.2) on the
module attempting the interrupt to prevent conflicting in-
puts. Under all circumstances, the module (or control panel)
programmed as the system master will be granted imme-
diate system control.
The display at the calling device will then show:
1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
(The default or user text is that which is entered at the
associated PEGAsys panel. This message cannot be
changed from the RDCM.)
The display will then show how many active alarms are
still present in the system (if any), and subsequently dis-
play how many active supervisory or trouble conditions are
still present in the system (if any). For example:
001
ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING
Again, in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off),
each event must be acknowledged separately. In the case
of multiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input
may be separate or programmed to global acknowledge.
A maximum of thirty (30) trouble messages can be acknowl-
edged at any one time.
For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display
and must be acknowledged.
1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM
and the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will
sound and the trouble LED will light.
L-3.1.2 SILENCE
When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowl-
edged, operation of the silence switch will have the fol-
lowing results:
The RDCM will pass the silence input to the
PEGAsys causing all outputs programmed for si-
lence to de-energize.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout com-
mand to all other RDCM(s). This gives the calling
device exclusive control over the system for 30
seconds. For these examples, assume RDCM
address 02. If another (non-master) module at-
tempts an interrupt, the following lockout message
will display for 5 seconds:
RDCM 02
IN CONTROL
Note: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be cus-
tomized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Con-
figuration Software manual.
After the 30 second control period, any other module can
provide system inputs (unless a module programmed as
system master assumes control).
L-3.1.3 RESET
After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared,
input devices programmed to the latching sequence will
show:
XXX
ALARMS ACTIVE
Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence
will show:
NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS
Operation of the reset switch will have the following re-
sults:
The RDCM will pass the reset input to the
PEGAsys, causing all conditions programmed to
cancel on reset to de-energize.
L-4 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout com-
mand to all other RDCMs. This gives the calling
device exclusive control over the system for 30
seconds and displays the following message:
SYSTEM RESET
If there are no further key entries at the calling
device (address 02), and no further system events
are detected, all modules and the PEGAsys will
display the system default message:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99
PEGASYS
In practice, the actual local time and date will be
shown.
In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going
into fault condition, actuation of hardware switch
S3 located behind the display membrane will cause
a hardware reset of the microprocessor.
L-3.1.4 SCROLL
When the Scroll key is pressed during any active system
event, the following will result:
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all
other RDCM(s). Calling device (address 02) will then have
exclusive control over the system as described in reset
above.
Note: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global
lockout command.
The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by
the next event in the buffer.
When a Scroll key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the
PEGAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to
the system.
LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and
hold the scroll key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light
for 5 seconds.
System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords
and gain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the
relevant keys are:
Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system func-
tion information.
Enter: Enter information into the system menu.
Backspace: Exit system menu or correct wrong
entries.
To enter the password, press the 0 key. The RDCM opens
the password entry menu and displays:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
Each key entry will then display the # character:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
####
If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become:
PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED
The RDCM will request another password entry request,
and, if correct, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second glo-
bal lockout command to all other RDCMs.
The calling device (address 02) will then have access to
the PEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu
operating instructions.
If during the password entry sequence any key other than
the numeric key (except Backspace) is pressed before
the Enter key, the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with
the default display.
L-3.2 LED Status Display
The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes:
Off: No system activity.
On Continuously: Acknowledged alarm, supervisory
or trouble.
Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm,
supervisory or trouble.
L-3.3 LCD Display
With no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will
display the default message:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99
PEGASYS
PEGASYS is the default message. This can be custom-
ized by PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration
Software manual.
L-3.4 Password Data Structure
Two system levels are available from the RDCM. These
are: Level 1 (User Level) and Level 2 (Installer Level). Refer
to the Menu Function and Menu Structure sections of
the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
manual for descriptions of the capabilities available through
these levels.
Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default
passwords for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default
passwords can be customized in the Level 2 Set Menu
Function. Changing passwords for the system can be ac-
complished from any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys.
L-3.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions
The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power sup-
ply and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during
the polling routine. The power failure display is:
L-5 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
REMOTE PSU FAULT ON
RDCM XX
If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during
the polling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble
message will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.
NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL
L-4 SPECIFICATIONS
Table L-1. RDCM/RDM Specifications
L A C I R T C E L E
e g a t l o v t u p n I l a n i m o n c d V 4 2
t n e r r u c y r o s i v r e p u S l a n i m o n A m 4 6
t n e r r u c m r a l A l a n i m o n A m 5 8
k r o w t e n 5 8 4 - S R s y s A G E P m o r f . t f 0 0 0 4 o t p U
G W A 8 1 # g n i s u l e n a p l o r t n o c
e r i w d e d l e h s n u / d e t s i w t
s M D R / M C D R m u m i x a M y n a n i s M D R 6 1 / s M C D R 5 1
g n i d e e c x e t o n , n o i t a n i b m o c
e l u d o m h c a e r o f m u m i x a m
e l y t s g n i r i W " B " s s a l C , 4 e l y t S A P F N
L A C I N A H C E M
s n o i s n e m i D H " 6 5 1 . 7 X W " 5 0 . 2 1
t h g i e W z o 3 1 , s b l 4
L A T N E M N O R I V N E
e r u t a r e p m e t g n i t a r e p O 2 3
o
0 ( F
o
0 2 1 ) C
o
9 4 ( F
o
) C
y t i d i m u h g n i t a r e p O g n i s n e d n o c - n o n % 5 8
L-5 INSTALLATION
See Figure L-4.
L-6 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
12.000
9.500
1.250
5.875
.409
SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F)
W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE
VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST
VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST
SW3
HARDWARE FOR
GND. CONNECTION
1/2" & 3/4"
COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS
(2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE
(1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.
FM
APPR
O
VED
R L U
PO
W
ER
SU
PPLY TW
ISTED
SH
IELD
ED
C
ABLE
TO
C
H
ASSIS/EARTH
G
R
O
U
N
D
.
SER
. N
O
.
MOUNTING FOR #10
(.190 DIA.) SCREWS
INSTRUCTION LABEL
CONNECTOR
DS1
Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM
M-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX M
ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE
M-1 INTRODUCTION
The Addressable AlarmLine
TM
Module (AAM) permits an
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
PEGAsys control panel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm,
alarm and trouble conditions to be transmitted to the control
panel via the RX/TX (Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM moni-
tors the resistance of the sensor cable and generates a pre-
alarm (if enabled), alarm or overheat output (if enabled) when
the resistance drops below the programmed threshold. The
module also supervises the AlarmLine cable for opens and
shorts, which will generate a fault condition. All of the pre-
alarm, alarm, overheat and trouble conditions will be displayed
on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the PEGAsys panel.
Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a single RX/TX
module. The use of multiple AAMs allows for flexibility in zon-
ing larger installations for location of alarm and zone output
control; the control panel acts as a central display and control
interface.
For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation
and Maintenance Manual (P/N 73.04).
TM
Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine Module Front
Panel
M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING
Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default ad-
dress of 000. This permits connection to the Power Com-
munication (PC) line without interfering with devices already
on the loop. Only one device with this default address
should be connected to the PC line at a time. Alternately,
the AAM address can be preset with a hand-held program-
mer (P/N 74-200013-001) after which the module can be
connected to the PC line. If a hand-held programmer is
not available, the address can be changed directly at the
CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2 of this
manual.
M-3 OPERATION
A change in temperature produces a change in resistance
between the loops within the sensor cable (as the tem-
perature increases, resistance decreases exponentially).
This change is continuously monitored by the AAM, which
generates an alarm or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined
level corresponding to the temperature set point.
The temperature at which the system will alarm is deter-
mined by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using
the control panels configuration software or CCM menu
options. The appropriate configuration setting for a given
set point is established by the use of a nomogram incor-
porating two known factors:
Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone
Length of the sensor cable
The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable al-
lows it to detect localized hot spot or a low level tempera-
ture increase over the entire length. For more detailed
information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Lin-
ear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled
component and is not field serviceable. Little or no main-
tenance is required.
Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual for further information on maintenance
and testing of field devices connected to the PEGAsys panel
RX/TX loop.
M-5 PARTS LIST
Refer to Chapter 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-6 INSTALLATION
Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Lin-
ear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
M-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
M-7 TESTING
Refer to Chapter 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
N-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX N
NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)
N-1 INTRODUCTION
The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown
in Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is
composed of two printed circuit board assemblies: the dis-
play control module (DCM) and the CCM printed circuit
board. The NCCM is available in two versions: P/N 76-
100008-501/-701 for single-loop systems and P/N 76-
100008-600/-800 for multi-loop systems.
SYSTEM
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
3
8
AC POWER
ALARM
PRE-ALARM
6
1
7
2
SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM TROUBLE
System Status Display
SILENCE
9
4
0
5
SILENCE
SCROLL
R
Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module
Front Panel
The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described
earlier in this manual, with the same capabilities. However,
the CCM printed circuit board has been designed to re-
ceive the optional Network Interface Card (see the physi-
cal description and menu options in Appendix J of this
manual), enabling networked operation.
Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main
processor module provides connection to the Remote Dis-
play Control Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module
(RDM) described in Appendix L of this manual.
N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION
The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of
all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX mod-
ule, and system data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM.
It processes the data based on pre-programmed instruc-
tions and transmits output commands to the output mod-
ules, optional NIC and/or RDCM or RDM modules, loop
output devices, and the adjunct display control module.
The CCM PCB contains the system CPU, real-time clock,
watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: a program-
ming input/output (PC) port and a printer output port. These
ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS) is used to program the sys-
tem. A multi-level password scheme protects the system
from unauthorized access.
The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to
display the current time and date on the system LCD and
provides basic information for real-time operations.
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the
system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory
failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are
controlled separately and report to appropriate panels.
The two individually programmable signal output circuits
(MP1 and MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling
devices (horns, bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 Amps
of 24 Vdc power. Optionally, the MP1 output can be pro-
grammed for releasing applications using solenoid-actuated
suppression equipment (agent and sprinkler).
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4)
are provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions
during alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @
30 Vdc rated.
All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to ac-
tivate from either panel or, if provided, network inputs.
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is
normally powered (24 Vdc) and will transfer on any sys-
tem (or, if provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm
and complete power-off condition. Relay is Form C, rated
1 Amp @ 30 Vdc.
Refer to Appendix I for mechanical installation details.
An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will
store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-
loop system events information. Network option does not
alter event limits, however, network events are recorded.
The system menu permits operator retrieval of recorded
events. The PCS program provides the ability to download,
store and print all or a portion of the event history buffer.
The NCCM common display module assembly (which is
physically and electronically attached to the main proces-
sor module) provides the system with the operator inter-
face and, if provided, network interface for control switches,
system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80
character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric
keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security pass-
word and navigating through the user menus. The system
buzzer provides two distinct signaling patterns for audible
warning of system alarms and troubles.
N-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
O-1 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX O
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
For central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel
must be configured for central station use through PCS
menu (Network Settings). A Silent Knight DACTModel
5104must be wired to the PEGAsys control panel, as
shown in Figure O-1. See the Model 5104 installation
manual for information regarding connection of the DACT
to the telephone line for alarm and trouble transmission(s).
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB
PegaSYS CCM PCB
NO NC C
Fault Relay
NO NC C
Volt Free
Relay 2
Zone 3 Alarm
Zone 4 Trouble
4.7k
4.7k
Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT
O-2 July 2003 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
220423
(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)
DATE:
1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)
4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE 5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT
7. USER EVALUATION
MANUAL IS: EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR COMPLETE INCOMPLETE
8. PROBLEM QUESTION SUGGESTION COMMENT: (check one)
9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION
PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)
10. ORIGINATOR 11. COMPANY NAME
12. ADDRESS
13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY
a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments
TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM
220423
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Attn. Documentation Manager
Place
Stamp
Here
FOLD
FOLD
76-100016-001 Rev. BD

2003 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. Printed in USA

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and it will repair or replace
any product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from
the date of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by Kidde-Fenwal Inc. For a full description of
Kidde-Fenwals LIMITED WARRANTY, which, among other things, EXCLUDES warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entire LIMITED
WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order and/or Original Invoice which will become part of your
sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning
material to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.
These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment
described, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection
with installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without
notice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which
are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred
to KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, Masssachusetts
AlarmLine, PEGAsys and ORION are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Kidde, HSSD and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.